2025 OWNER’S MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner Handbook for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to
restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................8
1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE............................................................ 14
2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL....................................71
3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING...........................................................................90
4
5 MULTIMEDIA ........................................................................................................ 140
5
6 SAFETY ...................................................................................................................215
6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY..............................................................................260
7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE................................................................ 276
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................330
9
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE................................................................................338
10
11 INDEX......................................................................................................................343
11
INTRODUCTION
WELCOME .............................................................8
SYMBOLS KEY.......................................................9
ROLLOVER WARNING............................................9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......... 10
SYMBOL GLOSSARY............................................10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ................................................................... 14
Key Fob...........................................................14
SENTRY KEY........................................................16
IGNITION SWITCH................................................17
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition....................... 17
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ........................ 18
How To Use Remote Start............................. 18
To Exit Remote Start Mode........................... 19
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped................................................ 19
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped................................................... 19
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped...........................19
Remote Start Cancel Message — If
Equipped................................................... 20
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.... 20
To Arm The System........................................ 20
To Disarm The System...................................20
Rearming Of The System...............................20
Security System Manual Override.................21
Tamper Alert...................................................21
DOORS ................................................................21
Manual Door Locks........................................21
Power Door Locks.......................................... 21
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry......... 22
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If
Equipped................................................... 23
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors................................................ 24
STEERING WHEEL...............................................24
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped...............................24
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped...............................24
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped..........25
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED....25
Programming The Memory Feature..............26
Linking And Unlinking The Remote
Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory...........26
Memory Position Recall.................................26
SEATS ..................................................................26
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped................................................... 26
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)................. 28
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped................................................... 31
Heated Seats — If Equipped..........................32
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped........... 33
Head Restraints ............................................33
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — IF
EQUIPPED.......................................................35
Introducing Voice Recognition...................... 35
Basic Voice Commands.................................35
Get Started.....................................................35
Additional Information...................................36
MIRRORS ............................................................36
Inside Rearview Mirror.................................. 36
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors............................. 36
Outside Mirrors.............................................. 37
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal — If
Equipped................................................... 37
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped................................................... 37
Power Mirrors — If Equipped......................... 37
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 37
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED......................38
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®...............................................38
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels......... 38
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device........... 38
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener..............................................38
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device...............................39
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button........................................................39
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming.......40
Security...........................................................40
Troubleshooting Tips..................................... 40
EXTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................. 41
Multifunction Lever........................................ 41
Headlight Switch............................................ 41
2
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs).................... 42
High/Low Beam Switch................................. 42
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped............ 42
Flash-To-Pass ................................................ 42
Automatic Headlights.................................... 42
Parking Lights And Panel Lights................... 42
Automatic Headlights With Wipers...............43
Headlight Delay..............................................43
Lights-On Reminder.......................................43
Turn Signals....................................................43
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............... 43
Automatic Headlight Leveling — If
Equipped................................................... 43
Battery Saver..................................................43
INTERIOR LIGHTS................................................43
Courtesy Lights.............................................. 43
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped.....44
Ambient Light — If Equipped......................... 44
Dimmer Control..............................................44
Illuminated Entry............................................45
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS.............. 45
Windshield Wiper Operation......................... 45
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped..............46
Rear Window Wiper/Washer.........................46
CLIMATE CONTROLS........................................... 46
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions............................................47
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC).......... 52
Climate Voice Recognition.............................52
Operating Tips ...............................................52
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT.............. 53
Storage........................................................... 53
USB/AUX Control ...........................................55
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped................57
Electrical Power Outlets.................................57
Power Inverter — If Equipped........................ 59
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ..........59
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ................. 60
WINDOWS ...........................................................62
Power Windows..............................................62
Wind Buffeting .............................................. 63
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED.....................63
Opening And Closing The Sunroof................63
Sunshade Operation......................................64
Pinch Protect Feature....................................64
Sunroof Maintenance....................................64
Ignition Off Operation.................................... 64
HOOD ..................................................................64
Opening The Hood......................................... 64
Closing The Hood...........................................64
LIFTGATE..............................................................65
Power Liftgate — If Equipped........................ 65
Cargo Area Features......................................66
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED..............67
Deploying The Crossbars...............................67
Stowing The Crossbars..................................68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..................................... 71
Instrument Cluster Descriptions...................72
SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ............................. 73
SRT Instrument Cluster Descriptions........... 73
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY....................... 74
Location And Controls....................................74
Engine Oil Life Reset......................................75
Display And Messages...................................76
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ......77
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load
Reduction Actions — If Equipped............. 80
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES................... 81
Red Warning Lights........................................81
Yellow Warning Lights....................................83
Yellow Indicator Lights...................................86
Green Indicator Lights...................................86
White Indicator Lights....................................87
Blue Indicator Lights......................................88
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ....... 88
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity............................................ 88
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ......................... 88
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE.......................................90
Automatic Transmission................................90
Normal Starting............................................. 90
AutoPark......................................................... 91
Extended Park Starting................................. 92
If Engine Fails To Start ..................................92
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F
Or −30°C)................................................. 92
After Starting..................................................93
3
ENGINE BREAK-IN — NON-SRT
RECOMMENDATIONS ....................................93
ENGINE BREAK-IN – SRT
RECOMMENDATIONS ....................................93
PARKING BRAKE................................................. 93
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............................94
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 95
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System............................................95
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode............................95
8-Speed Automatic Transmission.................96
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED............................ 98
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION.......................... 99
— If Equipped................................................. 99
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case — If
Equipped................................................... 99
Shifting Procedure.......................................100
TOW N GO — IF EQUIPPED................................101
Guidelines For Track Use............................ 101
SELEC-TRACK — IF EQUIPPED..........................102
Custom.........................................................103
Active Damping System...............................103
Launch Control............................................ 103
— If Equipped............................................... 104
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 105
POWER STEERING............................................ 105
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.............106
Autostop Mode.............................................106
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop.................................................. 106
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode....................................................... 106
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System.....................................................107
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System.....................................................107
System Malfunction.....................................107
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED.. 107
Cruise Control.............................................. 107
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).....................108
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.............................. 116
ParkSense Sensors..................................... 116
ParkSense Display.......................................116
ParkSense Warning Display........................119
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense............ 119
Operation With A Trailer.............................. 119
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System.................................................... 120
Cleaning The ParkSense System................120
ParkSense System Usage Precautions......120
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 121
LaneSense Operation..................................121
Turning LaneSense On Or Off..................... 121
LaneSense Warning Message....................121
Changing LaneSense Status...................... 123
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA............... 123
REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................ 124
VEHICLE LOADING ........................................... 125
Certification Label.......................................125
TRAILER TOWING .............................................126
Common Towing Definitions....................... 126
Trailer Hitch Classification.......................... 127
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) — Non-SRT........128
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped..............................................129
Trailer And Tongue Weight.......................... 129
Towing Requirements .................................130
Towing Tips ..................................................133
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME)..............................................133
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ....................................................134
Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel
Drive Models...........................................134
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive
Models (Single-Speed Transfer Case)... 135
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive
Models (Two-Speed Transfer Case)....... 135
DRIVING TIPS.................................................... 137
On-Road Driving Tips...................................137
Off-Road Driving Tips...................................137
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................140
CYBERSECURITY ..............................................140
UCONNECT SETTINGS...................................... 140
Customer Programmable Features............ 141
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.............................163
System Overview......................................... 163
Drag & Drop Menu Bar................................165
Safety And General Information................. 166
4
UCONNECT MODES.......................................... 166
Steering Wheel Audio Controls................... 166
Radio Mode..................................................167
Media Mode................................................. 177
Phone Mode.................................................179
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF
EQUIPPED ....................................................187
Is My Vehicle Connected?........................... 187
Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Services...................................................187
Getting Started With Connected
Vehicle Services..................................... 189
Using Brand Connect.................................. 190
Manage My Brand Connect Account..........198
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ......................... 198
Connected Services SOS FAQs — If
Equipped.................................................198
Connected Services Remote Door
Lock/Unlock FAQs.................................. 198
Connected Services Roadside
Assistance FAQs..................................... 199
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
If Equipped..............................................199
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs.. 199
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
Assistance FAQs — If Equipped..............199
Connected Services Remote Vehicle
Start FAQs............................................... 200
Connected Services Remote Horn &
Lights FAQs............................................. 200
Connected Services Account FAQs — If
Equipped.................................................200
Data Collection & Privacy............................201
PERFORMANCE PAGES.................................... 202
Timers.......................................................... 202
Gauges.........................................................204
Dynamometer (Dyno)/Engine.....................204
G-Force.........................................................205
Vehicle Dynamics........................................ 206
SRT DRIVE MODES — IF EQUIPPED.................206
Sport Mode..................................................206
Track Mode.................................................. 207
Tow Mode..................................................... 207
Snow Mode.................................................. 207
Auto Mode....................................................208
Custom Mode.............................................. 208
RACE OPTIONS..................................................210
Launch Control............................................ 211
Shift Light.....................................................212
GUIDELINES FOR TRACK USE..........................212
ECO MODE........................................................ 213
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....214
Regulatory And Safety Information.............214
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES............................................215
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 215
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA).............. 215
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System...... 216
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS......................... 220
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped.................................................220
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation................................................225
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).. 226
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................. 229
Occupant Restraint Systems Features...... 229
Important Safety Precautions.....................229
Seat Belt Systems ...................................... 230
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).... 235
Child Restraints .......................................... 245
SAFETY TIPS .................................................... 256
Transporting Passengers............................ 256
Transporting Pets ........................................257
Connected Vehicles..................................... 257
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle .............................................257
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle..................... 258
Exhaust Gas ................................................259
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .......................259
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ....................... 260
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED..... 260
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 262
Preparations For Jacking ........................... 263
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped.......................263
Jack Location — If Equipped....................... 263
Spare Tire Stowage — If Equipped..............264
Spare Tire Removal — If Equipped............. 264
Jacking Instructions — If Equipped.............265
JUMP STARTING ...............................................268
5
Preparations For Jump Start...................... 269
Jump Starting Procedure............................ 269
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED . 270
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS...........................271
MANUAL PARK RELEASE..................................272
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE.............................273
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 273
Rear-Wheel Drive Models............................ 274
All-Wheel Drive Models............................... 275
TOWING A DISABLED SRT VEHICLE.................275
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)............................................275
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)........................275
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING...................................276
Maintenance Plan........................................276
SCHEDULED SERVICING — SRT.......................279
Maintenance Plan — SRT............................280
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................283
3.6L Engine..................................................283
5.7L Engine..................................................284
6.2L Supercharged Engine.........................285
Checking Oil Level....................................... 286
Adding Washer Fluid................................... 286
Maintenance-Free Battery ......................... 286
Pressure Washing........................................287
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE.................................. 287
Engine Oil .................................................... 287
Engine Oil Filter .......................................... 288
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................ 288
Air Conditioner Maintenance .....................289
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................. 291
Body Lubrication .........................................292
Windshield Wiper Blades ...........................292
Exhaust System .......................................... 294
Cooling System............................................295
Brake System ..............................................297
Automatic Transmission..............................298
Front/Rear Axle Fluid.................................. 298
Transfer Case ..............................................299
Fuses............................................................299
Bulb Replacement ......................................309
TIRES................................................................. 312
Tire Safety Information ...............................312
Tires — General Information ...................... 318
Tire Types..................................................... 321
Spare Tires — If Equipped ..........................322
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...................... 323
Snow Traction Devices................................ 324
Tire Rotation Recommendations................326
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES...............326
Treadwear.................................................... 326
Traction Grades........................................... 326
Temperature Grades................................... 327
STORING THE VEHICLE ....................................327
Battery Storage Mode................................. 327
BODYWORK.......................................................327
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........327
Body And Underbody Maintenance............328
Preserving The Bodywork........................... 328
INTERIORS ....................................................... 328
Seats And Fabric Parts................................328
Plastic And Coated Parts............................ 329
Leather Surfaces.........................................329
Glass Surfaces ........................................... 329
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)....... 330
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................ 330
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . 330
Torque Specifications..................................330
FUEL REQUIREMENTS......................................331
3.6L Engine .................................................331
5.7L Engine..................................................331
6.2L Supercharged Engine......................... 331
Reformulated Gasoline .............................. 331
Materials Added To Fuel .............................331
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...................... 332
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles...................................................332
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.... 332
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...............332
Fuel System Cautions..................................332
FLUID CAPACITIES............................................ 333
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT................................. 334
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................. 334
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................335
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT...... 336
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT.... 336
6
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE .................................... 338
Prepare For The Appointment.................... 338
Prepare A List.............................................. 338
Be Reasonable With Requests...................338
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE............................... 338
Roadside Assistance...................................338
FCA US LLC Customer Center..................... 339
FCA Canada Customer Care....................... 339
Mexico..........................................................339
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands..............339
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)............. 340
Service Contract.......................................... 340
WARRANTY INFORMATION...............................340
MOPAR® PARTS............................................... 340
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS.........................341
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C..................................... 341
In Canada.....................................................341
ORDERING AND ACCESSING ADDITIONAL
OWNER’S INFORMATION............................. 341
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS......... 341
GENERAL INFORMATION..................................342
7
INTRODUCTION
WELCOME
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Dodge vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle
to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision
page 137.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details
of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped". All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your
vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service remember that authorized dealers know your Dodge best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
8 INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating
procedures that could result in a colli-
sion, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures
that could result in damage to your vehi-
cle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installa-
tion, operation, and reliability. If not fol-
lowed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on
easier use of the product or functionali-
ty.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional infor-
mation on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while
some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that
can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe
or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
INTRODUCTION 9
1
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to
be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when
operating your vehicle. See the following for the definition of each symbol
page
81
.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
page 81
Air Bag Warning Light
page 81
Brake Warning Light
page 81
Red Warning Lights
Battery Charge Warning Light
page 82
Door Open Warning Light
page 82
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
page 82
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
page 82
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
page 82
Hood Open Warning Light
page 83
Liftgate Open Warning Light
page 83
Oil Pressure Warning Light
page 83
10 INTRODUCTION
Red Warning Lights
Oil Temperature Warning Light
page 83
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
page 83
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
page 83
Vehicle Security Warning Light
page 83
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
page 84
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
page 84
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
page 84
Yellow Warning Lights
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
page 84
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
page 85
Low Fuel Warning Light
page 84
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
page 83
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
page 85
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
page 85
Service AWD Warning Light
page 85
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
page 85
INTRODUCTION 11
1
Yellow Warning Lights
LaneSense Warning Light
page 84
Service LaneSense Warning Light
page 84
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
page 85
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
page 86
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Low Indicator Light
page 86
NEUTRAL Indicator Light
page 86
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light
page 86
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
page 86
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Indicator Light
page 86
ECO Mode Indicator Light
page 86
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
page 86
LaneSense Indicator Light
page 86
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
page 87
Snow Mode Indicator Light
page 87
Sport Mode Indicator Light
page 87
12 INTRODUCTION
Green Indicator Lights
Sport Mode Indicator Light
page 87
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
page 87
Tow Mode Indicator Light
page 87
Track Mode Indicator Light
page 87
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
page 87
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
page 87
White Indicator Lights
Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light
page 87
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
page 87
Speed Warning Indicator Light
page 87
LaneSense Indicator Light
page 87
Valet Mode SRT Indicator Light
page 88
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
page 88
INTRODUCTION 13
1
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped),
and remote power liftgate operation. The key fob allows
you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate
the system. The key fob also contains an emergency
key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
● The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
● With ignition in the ON position and the vehicle
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
NOTE:
For SRT Models:
● SRT vehicles equipped with the 6.2L engine come
with two red key fobs, that allow for different engine
power levels
page 206.
● Only 6.2L engine v
ehicles can come equipped with
red key fobs.
Key Fob
1 — Unlock
2 — Liftgate
3 — Emergency Key
4 — Lock
5 — Remote Start
6 — Panic
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified
by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display
directions to follow
page 342.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five seconds
to unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To lock all the
doors and the liftgate, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
and the horn will chirp.
NOTE:
● If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob, and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and the security system will arm (if equipped).
● If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
again automatically if the key fob is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will
stay locked.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button within Uconnect Settings
page 140
.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN
or START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
● The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob. The Key Left
Vehicle feature will activate when the first door is
closed and no key fob is detected in the vehicle. If
the warning has been activated, and the other doors
are closed, no other warnings will be issued.
● These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are blocked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
● Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
● Perchlorate material — special handling may apply.
See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
● Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the back of the key
fob and pulling the emergency key out with your
o
ther hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release
2 — Emergency Key
2. Separate the key fob halves using a flat-blade
screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the two halves
of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of
the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
WARNING!
● The int
egrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
● If you think a battery may have been swallowed
or placed inside any part of the body, seek
immediate medical attention.
● Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
● Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
● Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
WARNING!
● Alw
ays remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
● For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics.
A blank key fob is one that has never been
programmed.
NOTE:
● When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
● Emergency keys must be ordered to the correct key
cut to match the vehicle locks.
● It is not mandatory to replace the key fob if a new
emergency key is needed, and vice versa.
NOTE:
For SRT Models: Vehicles equipped with the 6.2L and
6.4L engines, black key fobs must be replaced with
black key fobs and red key fobs must be replaced with
red key fobs
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine.
The system does not need to be armed or activated.
Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle
is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauth-
orized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and op-
erate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in
two seconds if invalid key fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check,
it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
page
342
.
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
● The engine is stopped
● Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are still available
ACC
● Engine is not started
● Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power
windows, etc.)
ON/RUN
● Driving position
● All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, etc.)
START
● The engine will start (when foot is on the brake
pedal)
NOTE:
If the ignition position does not change with a push of
the ignition button, and the instrument cluster display
message “Key Fob Not Detected” is being displayed,
the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this
situation, a backup method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side
opposite of the emergency key) against the START/
STOP ignition button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
WARNING!
● Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition is
in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and
START.
WARNING!
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove the key fobs from vehicle, place the
ignition in the OFF position and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
● For more information on normal starting procedures,
see
page 90.
● When opening the driver's door with the ignition in
ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position.
In addition to the chime, the message will display
“Ignition Or Accessory On” in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The
system has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the customer enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
page 342.
WARNING!
● Do no
t start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for
a 15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a
third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and with a
valid Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob in the vehicle, place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
● With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes.
● Remote Start can only be used twice.
● If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
● The par
king lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
● For security, power window and sunroof (if equipped)
operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
● The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
● Gear selector in PARK
● Doors closed
● Hood closed
● Liftgate closed
● Hazard switch off
● Brake pedal not pressed
● Battery at an acceptable charge level
● Panic button not pressed
● System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
● Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
● Ignition in OFF position
● Fuel level meets minimum requirement
● Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
● Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
18 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● Do no
t start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMO
TE
ST
AR
T
M
ODE
T
o driv
e the v
ehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP
ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again,
or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15
minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the previously
set operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
● To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
● For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote
Start Active — Push Start Button” will display in the
instrument cluster display until you push the START/
S
T
OP ignition butt
on.
R
EMO
TE
ST
AR
T
FR
ONT DEFROST ACTIVATION
— IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system
will automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes
or less. The timing is dependent on the ambient
temperature. Once the timer expires, the system will
automatically adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will turn on if selected in the Comfort menu
screen within Uconnect Settings
page 140. In
warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when Remote Start is activated, if
programmed in the Comfort menu screen. The vehicle
will adjust the climate control settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
● In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the climate settings will default to maximum heat,
with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost
timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
● In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
● In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or above,
the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level
Mode, and Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
page 46.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. The climate control settings will change if
manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in
Remote Start mode, and exit automatic override. This
includes the OFF button on the climate controls, which
will turn the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE — IF
EQUIPPED
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
● Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
● Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
● Remote Start Canceled — Timer Expired
● Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle
Security system is armed, interior switches for door
locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will
provide the following audible and visible signals:
● The horn will pulse
● The parking lights and/or turn signals will flash
● The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash
TO ARM
THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. If any doors, windows, or sunroof are open, close
them.
2. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
● For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
3. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
● Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
● Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone
page 22.
● Push the lock button on the key fob.
TO
DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
● Push the unlock button on the key fob.
● Grab the Passive Entry unlock door handle (if
equipped)
page 22.
● Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
NOTE:
● The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key
cylinder when the alarm is armed will sound the
alarm when the door is opened.
● The Vehicle Security system remains armed when
the power liftgate is opened using the liftgate button
on the key fob. If someone enters the vehicle
through the opened liftgate, then opens any door
from the inside, the alarm will sound.
● If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the
liftgate, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed and
the rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked
unless all doors are set to unlock on first press
within Uconnect Settings.
● When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred,
the Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain
in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
between cycles and up to eight cycles if the trigger
remains active) and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security system
in your absence, the horn will sound three times and
the exterior lights will blink three times when you
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the
rear doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim
panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
● For personal security and safety in the event of
a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● When lea
ving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Unsupervised use of the vehicle equipment may
cause severe person injuries and death.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate.
Power Door Lock Switches
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the
door will lock. Make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless signal
may get blocked, and the driver’s door may not unlock
automatically.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken
to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the
horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and the driver's door is
open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This
feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
NOTE:
● Passive Entry may be programmed on/off within
Uconnect Settings
page 140.
● The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob's wireless signal
and prevent the Passive Entry handle from locking/
unlocking the vehicle.
● Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for
whichever duration is set between 0, 30, 60 or
90 seconds. Passive Entry unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lamps.
● If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing,
or there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
● The door
s may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle.
● If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and will arm the Vehicle Security system (if
equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5
m) of the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the
vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock
the driver door automatically. Grabbing the passenger
door handle will unlock all doors and the liftgate
automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will
raise when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
page 140.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature, which will function if the ignition is in
the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open, and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed, the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key
fob. If one of the vehicle's Passive Entry key fobs is
detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive
Entry key fobs are detected outside the vehicle, the
Passive Entry system automatically unlocks all vehicle
doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third
attempt, ALL doors will lock, and the Passive Entry key
fob can be locked in the vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pull the electronic
liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles equipped
with a power liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle
and lift for manual liftgate vehicles.
NOTE:
● If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will open with
the handle and no key fob is required.
● The liftgate will either unlock along with the vehicle
doors, or it will need to be unlocked by pushing
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
selected setting in the Uconnect system
page
140
.
● The liftgate (and vehicle doors if unlocked) must be
locked using the lock button on the key fob, the
Passive Entry lock button, or the lock buttons on the
interior front door panels.
Electronic Liftgate Handle
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5
ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handle,
push the door handle lock button to lock all four doors
and liftgate.
NOTE:
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the
doors are locked with the door handle lock button.
This feature can be turned on or off within Uconnect
Settings
page 140.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
● After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle or door
handle button. This is done to allow you to check
if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle
without the vehicle unlocking.
● The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted.
● Close proximity to mobile devices can affect the
Passive Entry system.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
key fob lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel
page 342.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK ON EXIT FEATURE — IF
EQUIPPED
If Auto Unlock is enabled within Uconnect Settings
page 140
, this feature will unlock all the doors when
any door is opened if the vehicle is in PARK.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located
to the right of electronic liftgate handle.
NOTE:
When you push the button on the liftgate, either only
the liftgate will unlock or all doors and the liftgate
will unlock, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system page 140.
the electronic liftgate release, depending on the
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM —
REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock
and rotate to the lock or unlock position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
R
emember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
NOTE:
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the
lock knob up (unlocked position), lower the window, and
open the door with the outside door handle.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
is located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Handle
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the le
ver upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/
telescoping steering column control is located below
the multifunction lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering column.
24 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, use
the key fob or the memory switch on the driver's door
trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column
to saved positions
page 25.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
A
djusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating
element that helps warm your hands in
cold weather. The heated steering wheel
has only one temperature setting. Once the
heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay
on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within
the Uconnect system and, if equipped, on the
instrument panel below the radio. You can access the
button through the Climate or Controls menu of the
touchscreen.
● Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
● Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 19.
WARNING!
● Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions
must exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
● Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
steering wheel covers of any type of material. This
may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile saves desired position
settings for the following features:
● Driver seat
● Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
● Side mirrors
● P
ower tilt and telescopic steering column (if
equipped)
● A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
● Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can
be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
● Be sure to program the radio presets prior to
programming the memory settings.
The memory setting switch is located on the driver’s
door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
● The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
● The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Setting Buttons
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected
profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and
telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio
station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch,
and then push the desired memory button (1 or 2)
within five seconds. The instrument cluster display
will display which memory position has been set.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
Then, within five seconds, push and release button
(1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10
seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the
key fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK,
a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button (1 or 2) or the unlock
button on the key fob linked to the desired memory
position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by pushing
any of the seat adjustment switches. When a recall
is canceled, the driver's seat and telescopic steering
column (if equipped) will stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
● It is danger
ous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
(Continued)
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked To Fob” feature through the
Uconnect Settings
page 140.
WARNING!
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/
Rearward Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front
of the seat cushion, near the floor.
Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located
under the seat cushion and move the seat forward
or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached
the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback,
lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift
the recline lever and push the seatback forward. To
return to the seating position, raise the seatback and
lock it into place.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
WARNING!
● Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
WARNING!
might not be properly adjusted, and you could be
severely injured or killed. Only adjust a seat while
the vehicle is parked.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt and
be severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
60/40 Split Rear Seat — If Equipped
SECOND ROW FOLD-FLAT SEATS
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the
outboard side of the seat.
Release Lever
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded
for an extended period of time. This is normal and by
simply unfolding the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
EASY ACCESS FOR THIRD ROW
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled f
orward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the
seat.
Release Lever
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap
located behind the seatback.
Tumble Pull Strap
Tumbled Second Row
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second r
o
w seats are only
int
ended t
o be tumbled f
or entr
y and e
xit t
o the thir
d
r
ow seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
TO RAISE REAR SEAT
Fold the seat rearward to its original position, and lock
it into place. Then lift the head restraint until it locks
into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Rear Captain’s Chairs — If Equipped
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FOLD-FLAT
SEATS
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the
outboard side of the seat.
Release Lever
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded
for an extended period of time. This is normal and by
simply unfolding the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
EASY ACCESS FOR THIRD ROW
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the
seat.
Release Lever
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap
located behind the seatback.
Tumble Strap
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row
seats in the tumbled position. The second r
o
w
(Continued)
WARNING!
seats are only intended to be tumbled for entry
and exit to the third row seat. Failure to follow
these instructions could result in personal injury.
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini console,
there is a stepping pad to allow passengers to
easily access the third row seats.
Mini Console Stepping Pad
TO RAISE REAR SEAT
Fold the seat rearward to its original position, and lock
it into place. Then lift the head restraint until it locks
into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is no
t securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase
the cargo area. To lower either seat, pull on the release
handle located on the back of the seat and lower the
seat using the pull strap located next to the release
handle.
Release Handles
Third Row Folded
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The second row seats must be in their full upright
position, folded flat or tumbled when folding the third
row seats.
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the
strap located on the back of the seat. Then lift the head
restraint until it locks into place.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded
for an extended period of time. This is normal and by
simply unfolding the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) — IF
EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat.
There are two switches that control the movement of
the seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward
by using the seat switch. The seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat
switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
of the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
im
pede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on
the switch will raise and lower the position of the
support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning
to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
● When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is
greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when you place the vehicle’s
ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
● The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not available when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7
mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and
Easy Exit positions are stored in each Driver Memory
Setting profile
page 25.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or disabled)
through the programmable features in the Uconnect
system
page 140.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● P
ersons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
● Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater
to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been
(Continued)
WARNING!
overheated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located on the center stack below the radio
screen, or within the Uconnect system.
● Press the heated seat switch once to
turn the HI setting on.
● Press the heated seat switch a second time to turn
the MED setting on.
● Press the heated seat switch a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
● Press the heated seat switch a fourth time to turn
the heating elements off.
NOTE:
● Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
● The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
● The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 19.
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
The two second row outboard seats may
be equipped with heated seats. There
are two heated seat switches that allow
the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. The heated seat switches for each
heater are located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or off heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat
in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for off.
● Push the switch once to turn the HI setting on.
● Push the switch a second time to turn the LO setting
on.
● Push the switch a third time to turn the heating
elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the center stack below the radio
screen, or within the Uconnect system. The
fans operate at three speeds: HI, MED, and
LO.
● Press the ventilated seat switch once to choose HI.
● Press the ventilated seat switch a second time to
choose MED.
● Press the ventilated seat switch a third time to
choose LO.
● Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to turn
the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 19.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
WARNING!
● All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
● Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way driver and
passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
either of the head restraints require removal, see an
authorized dealer.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of the
head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as desired
and release. To adjust the head restraint rearward,
pull the top of the head restraint to the forward most
position and release. The head restraint will return to
the rear most position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
Forward Adjustment
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not
adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the
rear seat is folded to a load floor position, but do not
return to their normal position when the rear seat is
raised. After returning either seat to its upright position,
raise the head restraint until it locks in place. The
outboard head restraints are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it or push
downward on the head restraint to lower it.
Rear Head Restraint
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injur
y or death in
a collision. Always make sure the outboard head
restraints are in their upright positions when the seat
is to be occupied.
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, see
page
229
.
Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats
The center head restraint can be adjusted when
occupied, or removed for Child Seat Tethering. To
remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go
by pulling upward. Then, push the release button at
the base of the post while pulling the head restraint
upward. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward.
Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate
height.
WARNING!
● ALL the head restraints MUS
T be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the preceding reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
● Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision. Always make sure the
outboard head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
Center Head Restraint Release Button
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, see
page
229
.
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● A loose head restraint thr
own forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death
to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
removed head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
● ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the preceding reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
For improved visibility when in REVERSE, the third
row head restraints can be folded using the Uconnect
system.
Press the Controls button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
Press the Headrest Fold button to power
fold the third row head restraints.
NOTE:
● The head restraints can only be folded downward
using the Headrest Fold button. The head restraints
must be raised manually when occupying the third
row.
● Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — IF
EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect
system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following Voice Commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button or for the Uconnect 5 NAV With
10.1-inch Display, say the vehicle’s Wake Up word, “Hey
Uconnect”. After the beep, say:
● “
Cancel” to stop a current voice session
● “
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
● “
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
On Uconnect 5 systems, the factory default Wake
Up word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be
reprogrammed through the Uconnect Settings.
GET STARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
● Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may
impact recognition.
● Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
● Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your
Voice Command. You can also say the vehicle Wake
Up word and state your command. Some examples
of Wake Up words include “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey
Dodge”.
● A passenger can press the VR button shortcut on the
radio status bar to also issue a command.
● You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice
Command from the current category.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with Voice Recognition,
you may still have voice recognition buttons. These
buttons will work with Android Auto™ and Apple
CarPlay® by initiating a Siri or Google Assistant voice
recognition session. Depending on your device, you may
need to press and hold the VR button for one second to
begin a voice recognition session.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — For The Uconnect 4 With 8.4-inch Display: Push
The V
oice Recognition Button To Start A Phone Call,
Begin Radio, Media, Navigation (If Equipped) And
Climate Functions, Or Send Or Receive A Text
For The Uconnect 5 NAV Systems: Push The
Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media,
Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call,
And Send Or Receive A Text
For The Uconnect 5 Systems: Push The Phone Button
To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
Uconnect System Support:
● US residents visit
www
.DriveUconnect.com
or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
● Canadian residents visit
www.DriveUconnect.ca or
call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French)
Brand Connect services support:
● US residents visit
https://www.driveuconnect.com/
or call: 1-833-616-7527
● Canadian residents visit
https://
www.driveuconnect.ca/en or call: 1-833-648-1611
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.
You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button
at the base of the mirror. A light in the button will
illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is
activated. Some vehicles may be equipped with an auto
dimming mirror with no on/off button in the mirror. If
that is the case, the mirror will default to auto dimming
on and the feature can be disabled in the radio though
the butt
on on the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
ILL
UMINA
TED
VANIT
Y
M
IRR
ORS
T
o access an illuminat
ed vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature — If
Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the
sun.
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2024 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
page 342.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun
blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional sun
blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the
size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
● Full forward position
● Full rearward position
● Normal position
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN SIGNAL — IF
EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the lower
outer corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with
the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and
rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR — IF
EQUIPPED
The driver’s side outside mirror will automatically adjust
for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror. The
mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when
the inside mirror adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust
a mirror, push the mirror select button for the mirror
that you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch,
push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you
want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
Power mirror positions can be saved to a Driver Memory
Settings profile (if equipped)
page 25.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated whenever
you turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped)
page 46.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
● HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered
by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
● The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sun visor designate the three
different HomeLink® channels.
● To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with
each press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
● The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the V
ehicle Security
system is active
page 342.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
HOMEL
INK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device that is being programmed
to the HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held
transmitter is programmed to activate the device you
are trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A ROLLING
CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately visible when
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A GARAGE
DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to 3
inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want
to program while you push and hold the garage
door opener transmitter button you are trying to
replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code
final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire
is attached to the garage door opener motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor does
not operate, repeat the final steps for the rolling
code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor does
not operate, repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
● Y
our motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if
people or pets are in the path of the door or gate.
● Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
page 38.
Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling code,
or non-rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S.
gate operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner. The procedure may need to be performed
multiple times to successfully pair the device to your
HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK®
BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button
to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step
2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S.
gate operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure
while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish
to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink®
has successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly
when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It
may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases.
The garage door may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
● If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage door/
device should activate when the HomeLink®
button is pushed.
● To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after 20
seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2
and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
● Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
held transmitter.
● Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener
to complete the training for a rolling code.
● Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
● Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● Y
our motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transmitter with a
garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse”
feature as required by Federal safety standards.
This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel.
The headlight switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
cargo lights and f
og lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Dimmer Control
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Dimmer Control
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an
OFF detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the
headlight switch is placed in the parking lights position.
However, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be
activated along with the front and rear marker lights.
The DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake
is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the first detent to turn on headlights,
parking lights, and instrument panel lights. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for the AUTO
position.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
● To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on whenever
the engine is running. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the parking
brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be used
during normal nighttime driving.
NOTE:
● For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
fog lights are turned on.
● If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle
was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
page 140
.
● On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate or reduce intensity on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side),
or on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard
warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling
the multifunction back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by
automatically controlling the high beams through the
use of a camera mounted on the inside rearview
mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and
automatically switches from high beams to low beams
until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
● The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting or deselecting “Auto
Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect Settings
page 140
, as well as turning the headlight switch to
the AUTO position.
● Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the
vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on
the windshield or camera lens will cause the system
to function improperly.
● If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-
aimed to ensure proper performance. See a local
authorized dealer.
● To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-
Beam Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle
high beam lever six full on/off cycles within 10
seconds of ignition ON. System will return to default
setting upon ignition off.
FLASH-TO-PASS
Y
ou can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system
on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. The headlight time
delay can be programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds within
Uconnect Settings
page 140.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off
the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to
the O (off) position.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an
OFF detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
headlight switch is placed in the parking lights position.
However, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be
activated along with the front and rear marker lights.
The DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake
is engaged.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights,
it also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is programmable
through the Uconnect system
page 140.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime, the
vehicle will monitor outside brightness and decide if the
instrument panel needs to be dimmed or not
page
44
.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay
feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90
seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch
is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off.
Headlight delay can be canceled by either turning the
headlight switch on then off, or by placing the ignition in
the ON position.
NOTE:
The headlight delay timing is programmable through
the Uconnect system
page 140.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left
on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
vehicle will chime when the driver’s door is opened.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT LEVELING — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature prevents the headlights from interfering
with the vision of oncoming drivers. Headlight leveling
automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam
in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to
protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is OFF and any door is
left open or the dimmer control is rotated all the way
up to the dome light on position, the interior lights will
automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed
in the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically
turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned
on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or when the dimmer control is rotated
to its upward most position. If your vehicle is equipped
with a key fob and the unlock button is pushed, the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer
control all the way down, to the O (off) position, will
cause all the interior lights to go out. This allows the
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
Courtesy Lights
FRONT MAP/READING LIGHTS — IF
EQUIPPED
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side
of the console. These buttons are backlit for nighttime
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time.
The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The
lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the
key fob is pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
AMBIENT LIGHT — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light illuminates for improved visibility of
the floor and center console area.
Ambient Light
DIMMER CONTROL
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter)
or down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you
can supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip
odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the
control to its upward most position until you hear a
click. This is useful when headlights are required during
the day.
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Control
Dimmer Control (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
When programmed with the Uconnect system, the
headlights and courtesy lights will turn on when you
use the key fob to unlock the doors or open any door
page 140.
The time the lights stay on is programmable up to
90 seconds. The lights will fade to off after the
programmed time, or they will immediately fade to
off once the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
position from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will not turn off if the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated to the upward most position, past the
detent. The overhead and door courtesy lights will turn
off after 10 minutes when the ignition is placed in the
OFF position to protect the battery.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
instrument panel dimmer switch is rotated all the way
downward to the O (off) position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on
the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering
column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located on the end of the lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four
detent positions for intermittent settings, the fifth
detent for low wiper operation and the sixth detent for
high wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper Operation
1 — Push End Of Lever And Hold For Front Washer
2 — Rotate Downward For Mist
3 — Rotate For Rear Wiper/Washer Operation
4 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
Intermittent Wipers
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with
a variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can
be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18
seconds between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every
one second (fourth detent). If the vehicle is moving less
than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold. If the lever is pushed
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several cycles after the end of the lever
is released, and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are
in the off position, the wipers will operate for several
cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the washer will resume normal
operation.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing
of the windshield during freezing weather, warm
the windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST
position and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The washer function must be used in order
to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
page 292.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to one of four detent
positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
sensitive.
Setting three is preferred by the average driver during
normal rain conditions.
NOTE:
● The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
● The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the
windshield.
● Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce Rain Sensing performance.
● The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect system
page 140.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for
the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under
the following conditions:
●
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5
km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than
32°F (0°C).
●
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is in the ON position, and the gear selector
is in NEUTRAL, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of NEUTRAL.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering
column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating
a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent
operation and to the second detent for
continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the third detent to activate the
washer. The washer will continue to operate
as long as the switch is held.
Rotate the center portion downward from the OFF
position to activate the rear washer. The washer will
continue to operate as long as the switch is held.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
switch is released the pump will resume normal
operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is placed
in the OFF position, the wiper will automatically return
to the “park” position.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the
radio.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-
inch Display Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4 With 8.4-
inch Display Temperature Controls
Max A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX
A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is
ON. Pressing this button or function again will cause
the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and
the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can
be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other
settings will cause the MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is
on.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin.
NOTE:
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed. If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an
accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle
water spray from the front of the radiator and through
the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen grayed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
control selection. Continuous use of Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended. Recirculation mode may automatically
adjust to optimize customer experience for warming,
cooling, dehumidification, etc.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the current setting.
The AUTO button automatically controls the
interior cabin temperature by adjusting distribution
and amount of airflow. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be
active during AUTO operation to improve performance.
Performing this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes. AUTO
mode is highly recommended for efficiency
page
52
.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button,
or push and release the button on the
faceplate, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost
indicator illuminates when the Front Defrost is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the
Front Defrost mode button, the climate system will
return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10
minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
● Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
(Continued)
CAUTION!
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
● Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window.
● Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the Up button on the faceplate
or press and slide the temperature
bar towards the red arrow button on
the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings.
Push the Down button on the faceplate
or press and slide the temperature
bar towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature
settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The
SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC
is on. SYNC is used to synchronize the
front passenger temperature and rear passenger
temperature, mode, and blower settings with the driver
temperature, mode, and blower settings. Changing
the front passenger temperature or rear passenger
temperature, mode, and blower settings while in SYNC
will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower will
cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower
control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
●
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn
the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you
turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
●
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce
the blower setting and the large blower icon to
increase the blower setting. Blower speed can also
be selected by pressing the blower bar area between
the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing the Mode button
on the faceplate, or one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen to change
the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from
the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets and demist outlets.
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5/5 NAV
With 10.1-inch Display Rear Controls
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 4
With 8.4-inch Display Rear Controls
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
● Press the Rear Climate button on the touchscreen
to display the rear climate controls. The control
functions now operate the rear system.
● Press the Front Climate button on the touchscreen to
return to the front climate controls.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release this button to access
the rear climate controls. The Rear Climate
indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are ON.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
REAR AUTO BUTTON
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting.
The REAR AUTO indicator will illuminate
when REAR AUTO is on. This feature
automatically controls the rear interior cabin
temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the rear
system to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes
page 52.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out
the rear manual temperature controls from
adjusting the rear temperature and blower
settings. The LOCK REAR indicator will
illuminate when LOCK REAR is on. Press and release
this button again to exit the feature.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release to return to the Front
Climate Control Screen.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC (or SYNC To Driver) button
on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator will
illuminate when SYNC is on. SYNC is used
to synchronize the front passenger temperature and
rear passenger temperature, mode, and blower settings
with the driver temperature, mode, and blower settings.
Changing the front passenger temperature or rear
passenger temperature, mode, or blower settings while
in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Rear Blower Control is used to regulate
the amount of air forced through the rear
climate system. There are seven blower
speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using the buttons on the touchscreen. Use the
small blower icon (or blower icon with the downward
arrow) to reduce the blower setting, and the large
blower icon (or blower icon with the upward arrow)
to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be
selected by pressing the blower bar area between the
icons.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
buttons on the touchscreen to change the
airflow distribution mode. The rear airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the headliner outlets, the floor outlets or
both.
HEADLINER MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side shuts off
the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level
Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from
both the headliner outlets and the floor
outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Floor
Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL OFF BUTTON
To manually set the rear blower controls to
off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower
Off button.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control — If
Equipped
The rear system temperature controls are located on
the headliner over the second row seating area.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear
right side of the third row seats and overhead outlets
at each outboard rear seating position. The system
provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool,
dehumidified air through the headliner outlets.
AUTO BUTTON
Turn the blower knob to the AUTO setting.
This feature automatically controls the rear
interior cabin temperature by adjusting
airflow distribution and amount. Changing
the blower knob to any other blower setting will cause
the rear system to switch to manual mode
page
52
.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Turn the rear temperature knob to adjust the
temperature.
Turn the knob to the right (clockwise) to
raise the temperature.
Turn the knob to the left (counterclockwise)
to lower the temperature.
The rear temperature setting is displayed in
the control head.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
Turn the rear blower knob to regulate the
amount of air forced through the system
in any mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the knob clockwise
from the off position. The rear blower setting is
displayed in the control head.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Turn the rear mode knob to adjust airflow
distribution. The rear mode settings are
displayed in the control head. The rear
airflow distribution mode can be adjusted
so air comes from the headliner outlets, the floor
outlets, or both.
HEADLINER MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut
off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets
and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR TEMPERATURE LOCK
The Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the
control head is illuminated when the rear
controls are locked by the front system.
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the
rear display. The rear temperature and air source are
controlled from the front Uconnect system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear
ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is
turned off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center
of the vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
● Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen. This turns off the Rear
Temperature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
● Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
● ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your
comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel and the word
“AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC display,
along with two temperatures for the driver and
front passenger. The system will then automatically
regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver,
passenger, and rear temperatures. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level,
it is not necessary to change the settings. You
will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is no
t necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by
changing the front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC
display will be turned off when the system is being used
in the manual mode.
NOTE:
The system will not automatically sense the presence of
fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must
be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
● “
Set driver temperature to 70degrees”
● “Set passenger temperature to 70degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control system through an intake grille, located in the
right side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the passenger second row door. Do not
block or place objects directly in front of the inlet
grille or heater outlets. The electrical system could
overload causing damage to the blower motor.
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
for suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is
recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system
is functioning properly and the proper amount, type,
and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the
Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see
page 327.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Air Filtration System filters 95% of air particulates,
reducing mant types of solids and liquid from airborne
matter - such as dust, smoke, droplets, and aerosols.
Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air
filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and blower on
high. Roll down the win-
dows for a minute to
flush out the hot air. Ad-
just the controls as need-
ed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather Turn (A/C) on and set
the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid Conditions Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to keep win-
dows clear.
Cold Weather Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If wind-
shield f
ogging star
ts t
o
occur
, mo
v
e the contr
ol
t
o
(Mix Mode).
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Front Center Console
The front center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward
on the small latch located on the lid.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
Storage Compartment Latches
1 — Upper Storage Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Storage Compartment Latch
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Sunglasses Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided
for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage
compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push
the push cover on the door to open. Push the push
cover on the door to close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an upper and
a lower storage area.
Storage Compartment
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward
on the small latch located on the front of the lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Storage Compartment Latches
1 — Upper Storage Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Storage Compartment Latch
NOTE:
Lower storage compartment light is always on with
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
The upper storage compartment may also be lifted
forward. Push in the release button located on the back
of the lid.
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders
or devices with cords routing through upper storage
area. Damage may occur to upper console lid and
device cables when upper storage compartment is
lifted forward.
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Storage Compartment Rear Push Button
When lifted forward, there is access to the lower
storage compartment.
Lower Storage Compartment
NOTE:
When the lower storage compartment is accessed, it
allows the armrest to flip forward for Fold-Flat mode.
Fold-Flat mode allows the console armrest to be
lowered below the Fold-Flat seat plane and protects the
armrest vinyl from damage when using the vehicle to
haul cargo.
Fold-Flat Mode
Open storage areas, or cubby bins with removable
liners, are located rearward of the cupholders and in
the lower front of the console.
Console Cubby Bins
Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin with removable
liner, is located in the front of the console.
Console Cubby Bin
USB/AUX CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
if equipped. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
Connecting The AUX Audio Input Or
External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an external USB
device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port which is
located in the center console.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
The USB ports on the media hub are equipped with
a Smart Electronic Voltage Regulator (Smart Charge)
feature. This feature allows a device to charge for up to
one hour after the vehicle is powered off.
Integrated Center Console USB/AUX Media HUB
1 — Mini-USB Type C Port
2 — Standard USB Type A Port
3 — AUX Port
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized
to the vehicle’s USB control system (an external USB
device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio
device starts charging and is ready for use.
Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will
begin charging and is ready for use with the system.
Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports can be used
at the same time but cannot be used simultaneously
while playing media. When both Type C and Type A
charge-only USB ports are in use they will be charged at
a reduced rate.
NOTE:
If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it
may not communicate with the USB control system until
a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio device
connected to the USB control system may charge it to
the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an external USB device to connect to the USB
port:
● The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s
sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title,
album, etc.) information on the radio display.
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track information
may not be present on the radio display.
● The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the contents.
● The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
NOTE:
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Second Row USB Charging Port
Second Row USB Charging ports can be used for
charging purposes only. Use the connection cable to
connect an external USB device to the vehicle’s USB
charging ports which are located either on the rear
of the front center console and/or in the second row
center console.
Rear Center Console USB Ports
Second Row Center Console USB Port
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.
56 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped
with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the
front passengers.
Light Ring In Front Cupholder
The rear cupholders may also be equipped with a
light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control
page 44.
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either
a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet
is powered. Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are
powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position, while the outlets labeled with a battery symbol
are connected directly to the battery, and are powered
at all times.
NOTE:
● All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
● Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W (13
Amp) at 12 Volt. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power rating
is exceeded the fuse protecting the system needs to
be replaced.
● Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets
as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located to the right of the
climate controls.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there may also be
a power outlet located in the storage area of the center
console.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
Front Center Console Outlet — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center
console, there is also a power outlet located in the
lower storage area of the rear full center console.
Rear Full Center Console Outlet
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to battery
powered at all times by switching the power outlet right
rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel from fuse
location F90 to F91.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right
R
ear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument
Panel
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
● Only de
vices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
● Do not touch with wet hands.
● Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
● If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
● Man
y accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
● Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these
intermittently and with greater caution.
● After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must
be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W inverter outlet located on
the back of the center console to convert DC current
to AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring
power up to 150 W. Certain video game consoles
exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded,
the power inverter automatically shuts down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the
outlet the inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
● Do no
t insert any objects into the receptacles.
● Do not touch with wet hands.
● Close the lid when not in use.
● If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
®
wireless charging pad located below the center stack,
within the storage compartment. This charging pad is
designed to wirelessly charge your Qi
®
enabled mobile
phone. Qi
®
is a standard that allows wireless charging
of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
®
wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi
®
wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a
specialized back plate can be purchased from your
mobile phone provider or a local electronics retailer.
Please see your phone’s Owner’s Manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator light.
Place the device inside the prepared area delimited in
the mat as shown in the image. Incorrect positioning
will prevent the phone from charging.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
LED Indicator Status:
● No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device. Device may not be compatible with the Qi
®
standard.
● Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
● Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object is
detected.
● Green Light: Device has completed battery charging
(if device is equipped to transmit this information).
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
● The presence of the Near-Field Communication
(NFC) function active on a smartphone could signal
malfunction anomalies.
● The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position in order
for the phone to charge.
● To avoid interference with the key fob search, the
wireless charging pad will stop charging when any
door or liftgate is opened, even if the engine is
running.
● Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display
facing upward, and phone not covering the LED) on
the wireless charging pad.
● If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light
to illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up
and placed back on the charging pad to resume
charging.
● Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone
is connected to a wired charger.
● The phone’s pr
otective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
● iPhones
®
equipped with Magsafe
®
may affect the
charging function, and may cause higher phone
temperature.
● Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad
so that its charging parts connect with the charging
coils of the system. Movement of the phone during
charging may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
● Having multiple applications open on the phone
while charging will reduce the charging efficiency,
and may even shut down an application that is
actively running (i.e. Apple CarPlay
®
). This may also
cause the phone to overheat.
● Wireless chargers may implement certain methods
to prevent the phone from overheating during
charging such as slowing down the rate of charge.
In certain instances, the device may shut down for
a brief period of time (when the device reaches a
certain temperature). If this happens, it does not
mean there is a fault with the wireless charging pad.
This may just be a protective measure to prevent
damage to the phone.
● The use of multiple wireless functions at the same
time (wireless charging, Apple CarPlay
®
, Android
Auto
™
) could cause the device to overheat, resulting
in limitation of the functions or it turning off. In
this case, it is recommended to connect the system
using the USB port.
● Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/
magnetized object inside the mobile phone housing
or near the wireless charging pad.
● T
o protect your phone from overheating, the wireless
charging pad is equipped with an integrated cooling
fan.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging
pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can
cause excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob.
Placing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad
blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
Four auxiliary switches are located in the lower switch
bank of the instrument panel and can be used to power
various electrical devices.
The functionality of the auxiliary switches can be
changed via the Uconnect Settings. All switches can
be configured for setting the switch type operation to
latching or momentary, power source of either battery
or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key
cycles.
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type
is set to latching and power source is set to ignition
within Uconnect Settings
page 140.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that power
four blunt cut wires. These wires are located under the
instrument panel in the passenger compartment and
under the hood to the right, near the battery.
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auxiliary Switches
Wire Color Chart
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side
near battery)
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side
near battery)
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side
near battery)
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink
Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side
near battery)
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided
with the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/
installation of your electrical devices.
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a fused
battery wire and ignition wire are also located in the
interior, on the passenger side under the instrument
panel.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The power window controls are located on the driver's
door trim panel.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be operated by
using the single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel. The window controls will operate only when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
To open the window part way (manually), push the
switch to the first detent and release it when you want
the window to stop.
The power window controls remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition has been placed in the OFF
position. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this
feature.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and
do not let children play with power windows. Do
not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the windows while operating
the power window switches. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
Automatic Window Features
Auto-Down Feature
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch
in either the up or down direction and release the
switch.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — Driver And
Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-Up, it
will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during Auto-Up.
If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent
and hold it to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the window is
closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the
second detent to open the window completely and
continue to hold the switch down for an additional
two seconds after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button. To enable
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
the window controls, push and release the window
lockout button again.
Power Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof/Power Sliding Top (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If
the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or
open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
● Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while operating
the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
● In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
● Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-
half second; the sunroof and sunshade will open
automatically and stop at full open position.
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from
any position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the switch rearward; the sunroof and
sunshade will open and automatically stop at full open
position.
Push and hold the switch forward and the sunroof
will close from any position and stop at a full closed
position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof
will remain in a partially opened position until the
switch is operated and held again.
Venting The Sunroof
Push and release the Vent button within one-half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called Express Vent, and it will occur regardless
of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing
of the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If
an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected,
the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the
obstruction if this occurs.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the sunroof
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the top’s path before closing.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
● The power sunroof switch can remain active in
Accessory Delay for up to approximately 10 minutes
after the vehicle’s ignition is placed to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
● This feature is programmable using the Uconnect
system
page 140.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle,
move the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
Safety Latch Location
NOTE:
● Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
● Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
● While lifting the hood, use both hands.
● You may have to push down slightly on the hood
before pushing the safety latch.
CAUTION!
Be sure to disengage the rod and secure it in closed
position bef
ore closing the hood. Damage may occur.
CLOSING THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front edge
of the hood with moderate force until the angle is below
the crossover point (where the gas props are no longer
resisting) and let the hood continue to fall closed from
its own inertia.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
● Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
● Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
downward push at the center front edge of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never
drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened by
pushing the liftgate release handle
page 22
or by pushing the liftgate button
on the key fob. Push the liftgate button on
the key fob twice within five seconds to open or close
the power liftgate.
NOTE:
● When using the liftgate button on the key fob to
open the liftgate while the vehicle is locked, only the
liftgate will unlock leaving the other doors to remain
locked. Closing the liftgate will not relock the liftgate.
The lock button on the key fob, or the Passive Entry
lock button must be pushed to relock.
● If the electronic liftgate handle is used to open the
liftgate and all the doors unlock, the liftgate and
vehicle doors must be locked again. Use the key fob,
Passive Entry lock button, or the power door lock
switches on the front door panels.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed
by pushing the liftgate button located on the front
overhead console. If the liftgate is fully open, it can be
closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the left
rear trim panel. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the
button again will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed
two times, the turn signals will flash to signal that the
liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock
is enabled in the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate
chime will be audible. The chime can be turned on or
off through the Uconnect Settings
page 140.
NOTE:
● In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate,
an emergency liftgate latch release can be used
to open the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch
release can be accessed through a snap-in cover
located on the liftgate trim panel.
● If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path
is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
● The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0
mph (0 km/h).
● The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or
ice from the liftgate before pushing any of the power
liftgate switches.
● If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position. After multiple
obstructions in the same cycle, the liftgate will
automatically stop and must be opened or closed
manually.
● There are also pinch sensors attached to the side
of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
● If the liftgate is only partially open, push the liftgate
button on the key fob twice to operate the liftgate.
● If the liftgate release handle is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will
disengage to allow manual operation.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
WARNING!
● Driving with the lif
tgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
● If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
CAR
GO A
REA
FEA
TURES
Cargo St
orage
There is a remo
v
able st
orage bin locat
ed on the left
side of the rear cargo area.
Additional storage can be found in the load floor. To
access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the
storage lid.
Load Floor Handle
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If
Equipped
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to secure
loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect
passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grab the cover at the center handle, and pull it
over the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the
slots in the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop
and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the
cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the
vehicle.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle
is moving.
Tie-Down Hooks
WARNING!
● Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a
tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat
to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
● To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
● Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door
or left door center pillar.
(Continued)
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● Alw
ays place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
● Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
● Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or accident.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack.
Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
DEPLOYING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar.
Thumb Screw
NOTE:
The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
2. Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by
sliding the crossbar towards the center of the roof.
Repeat with the crossbar on the opposite side.
Removing Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
cr
ossbar
s t
o pre
v
ent damage t
o the v
ehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
3. Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot
supports at each end.
Bending Pivot
4. Position the crossbars across the roof making
sure the letters on the crossbars align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Positioning Crossbars
5. Slide the crossbar into the deploy position by
moving it towards the matching letter in the side
rail. Be sure the crossbar is fully deployed with the
crossbar pushed as far into the slot as possible.
Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both thumb
screws completely.
Installing Crossbars
6. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to
complete the deployment of the crossbars.
Deployed Crossbars
STOWING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar
away from the matching letter to remove it from
the deployed position. Repeat with the other
cr
ossbar.
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot
supports at each end.
Crossbar Pivot
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with
the matching letters on the side rail.
Stowing Crossbars
4. Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center
of the roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the
side rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten
the thumb screws completely.
Tightening Crossbar
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar
on the opposite side.
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
● To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
● If any metallic object is placed over the satellite
radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience
interruption of satellite radio reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off
the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof
rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
● T
o prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly
on the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on
the roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
● To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy
loads as evenly as possible and secure the load
appropriately.
● Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as
supplementary tie down points only. Do not use
ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check
the straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
● Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
CAUTION!
● T
ravel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on
the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes
or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift
to a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
● The use of Sport Mode, Track Mode, or Launch
Control is not recommended when using the Roof
Luggage Rack to carry a load.
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
3
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
● Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
● Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
● The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
● The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats
page 295.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage y
our vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
4. Instrument Cluster Display
● The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
page 74.
5. Fuel Gauge
● The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
● The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located
page 124.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when
the ignition is first cycled.
SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
● Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Tachometer
● Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
3. Temperature Gauge
● The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within 203°F - 230°F
(95°C - 110°C) indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
3
● The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats
page 295.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads greater than 230°F
(110°C) pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains above 230°F
(110°C), turn the engine off immediately and
call an authorized dealer for service.
4. Instrument Cluster Display
● The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
page 74.
5. Fuel Gauge
● The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
● The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when
the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver.
Opening/closing of a door will activate the display for
viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers,
in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display
is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show how systems
are working and give you warnings when they are
not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you
to scroll through the main menus and submenus. You
can access the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
of the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel.
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
● Left Arrow Button
Push the left arrow button to return to the main
menu from an info screen or submenu item.
●
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu.
●
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
●
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu.
●
OK Butt
on
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push and hold the OK button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
● Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in gray under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
● Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus
available, the position within the submenus is shown
here.
● Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
● Gear Selector Status (PRND)
● Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy, Time, Trailer Trip and Gain)
● All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Status — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of
the main menu. The main display area also displays
pop-up messages that consist of approximately 60
possible warning or information messages. These pop-
up messages fall into several categories:
● Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type
of message takes control of the main display area
for five seconds and then returns to the previous
screen. Most of the messages of this type are
then st
ored (as long as the condition that activated
it remains active) and can be reviewed from the
“Messages” main menu item. Examples of this
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp
Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
●
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
leaves the vehicle with the lights on).
●
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote
Start feature. This message type is displayed until
the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this
message type are “Remote Start Canceled - Door
Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to
Start.”
●
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type
of message takes control of the main display
area for five seconds and then returns to the
previous screen. An example of this message type
is “Automatic High Beams On.”
ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the instrument cluster display for five
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
3
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the
right arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the
OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display
will update to show 100%. If conditions are not
met a pop-up message of “To reset oil life engine
must be off with ignition in run” will be displayed
(for five seconds), and the user will remain at the
Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the
up
or down arrow
button to exit the submenu screen.
NOTE:
If the indicat
or message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to
the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES
Includes the following, but not limited to:
Front Seat Belts
Unbuckled
Driver Seat Belt
Unbuckled
Passenger Seat
Belt Unbuckled
Traction Control
Off
Washer Fluid
Low
Oil Pressure
Low
Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Anti-
lock Brake Sys-
tem
Service Elec-
tronic Throttle
Control
Service Power
Steering
Cruise Off
Cruise Ready ACC Override Cruise Set To
XXX mph or
km/h
Service Shifter Tire Pressure
Screen With
Low Tire(s)
Service Tire
Pressure Sys-
tem
Park Brake En-
gaged
Brake Fluid Low Engine Temper-
ature Hot
Lights On Right Front Turn
Signal Light Out
Right Rear Turn
Signal Light Out
Left Front Turn
Signal Light Out
Left Rear Turn
Signal Light Out
Ignition or Ac-
cessory On
Vehicle Not In
Park
Remote Start
Active Push
Start Button
Remote Start
Canceled Fuel
Low
Remote Start
Canceled Door
Open
Remote Start
Canceled Hood
Open
Remote Start
Canceled Lift-
gate Open
Remote Start
Canceled Time
Expired
Remote Start
Disabled Start
To Reset
Service Air Bag
System
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Air Bag
Warning Light
Door Open Liftgate Open
Hood Open Shift Not Al-
lowed
Vehicle Speed
Too High To
Shift to D
Vehicle Speed is
Too High to Shift
to R
Vehicle Speed is
Too High to Shift
to P
Service Trans-
mission
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white or yellow telltales area on the left, and the green
or red telltales area on the right.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
main menu items for several features. Use the up
and down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver
interactive display menu options until the desired menu
is reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the main gauge menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release the
left
or right arrow button to select the analog or
digital type speedometer display. Push and release
the
OK button to toggle units (mph or km/h) of the
speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push the
left or
right
arrow button to scroll through the information
submenus.
Tire Pressure Monit
or Syst
em
● If tire pressure is
OK
f
or all tires a v
ehicle icon is
displa
y
ed with tire pressure v
alues in each corner of
the icon.
● If one or more tires ha
v
e lo
w pressure, “Inflate Tire
To XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon and the
tire pressure values in each corner of the icon with
the pressure value of the low tire are displayed in a
different color than the other tire pressure value.
● If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire Pressure is an information only function, and
cannot be reset
page 226.
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
● Displays the current temperature of the coolant.
Transmission Temperature
● Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temperature
● Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
● Displa
ys the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
● Displa
ys the current oil lif
e of the v
ehicle.
Batt
er
y V
oltage
● Displa
ys the current v
oltage le
vel of the battery.
○
Storage Mode (SRT) — If Equipped
○ Through this option, the vehicle can be placed
into Storage mode.
Intake Air Temp (SRT) — If Equipped
● Displays the current temperature of the air entering
the engine.
Engine Torque (SRT) — If Equipped
● Displays the current engine torque.
Engine Power (SRT) — If Equipped
● Displays the current engine power.
Air/Fuel Ratio (SRT 6.2L Only) — If Equipped
● Displays the current air/fuel ratio.
Boost (SRT 6.2L Only) — If Equipped
● Displays the current boost pressure.
Intercooler Coolant Temp (SRT 6.2L Only) — If Equipped
● Displays the current temperature of the coolant in
the intercooler.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
3
Performance Features — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Performance Features icon/title is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the
left or right arrow button to scroll through the
performance feature submenus.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
P
er
f
ormance F
eatures is int
ended f
or of
f-highw
a
y or
track use only and should no
t be done on an
y public
roadways. It is recommended that these features
be used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The Performance Features include the following:
● 0-60 m
ph (0-1
00 km/h) Timer
○ Best
○ Last
○ Current
● 0-1
00 m
ph (0-160 km/h) Timer
○ Best
○ Last
○ Current
○ R
eaction Time — If Selected
● 0-60ft Duration
○ Best
○ Last
○ Current
○ Reaction Time — If Selected
● 1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
○ Best
○ Last
○ Current
○ Reaction Time — If Selected
● 1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
○ Best
○ Last
○ Current
○ Reaction Time — If Selected
● Braking Distance
○ Distance
○ From Speed
● Current G-Forces
● Peak G-Forces
● Lap Timer
● Lap History
○ Will list the last f
our laps with the best lap
highlighted in green.
● Top Speed
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist display icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display then use the
left or
right arrow button to choose adaptive cruise control
or LaneSense
page 108.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or do
wn
arrow button
until the F
uel Econom
y Menu icon/title is highlight
ed.
Push the
lef
t
or right arrow button to scroll the
submenus, one with current fuel economy display and
one without it.
● Current MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
● Average MPG, L/100 km, or km/L
● Range to empty
● Press the
OK button to reset the average fuel
economy
NOTE:
The Range to empty feature is not able to be reset
through the instrument cluster display controls.
Trip
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display, then push and release the left or
right
arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B.
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
following:
● Distance
● Average Fuel Economy
● Elapsed Time
Hold the
OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up
or down
arrow button on the steering wheel to
see the Stop/Start status in the driver
interactive display
page 106.
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trailer Tow Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
left
or right arrow button to select Trailer Trip or Trailer
Brake.
Trailer Trip will display the following:
● Distance
NOTE:
Press and hold the OK button to reset all the
information.
Trailer Brake will display the following:
● Output
● Type
● Gain
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This menu will display the
audio source information, including the Song name,
Artist name, and audio source with an accompanying
graphic.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the
left or right arrow button will allow you
t
o see what the st
ored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will
be a closed en
v
elope.
Screen Se
tup
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts
on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed
in the instrument cluster as well as the location that
information is displayed.
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Compass Outside Temp
Upper Left or Upper Right
Time Range To Empty
(RTE)
Fuel Economy
Average
Fuel Economy
Current
Trip A Trip B
Trailer Trip Gain
Current Gear
● On
● Off
Gear Display
● Full
● Single
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Driver Assist
(Sho
w/Hide)
Stop/Start
Vehicle Info Fuel Economy
(Show/Hide)
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
(Show/Hide)
Performance –
If Equipped
(Show/Hide)
Trip (Show/
Hide)
Audio (Show/
Hide)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
3
Favorite Menus
Stored Messag-
es
Screen Setup
NOTE:
Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK button to
choose whether to show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
Defaults
● Restore
● Cancel
Diagnostics (SRT) — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Diagnostics icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button to display the diagnostic trouble codes and
descriptions. When the end of the list is reached,
“No or End of Diagnostic Code” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
Speed Warning (SRT) — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Speed Warning Menu icon/title is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter speed warning. Use the up or
down arrow button to select a desired speed, then
push and release the OK button to set the speed.
When the set speed is exceeded, the indication will
light up yellow and flash along with a pop-up message
of “Speed Warning Exceeded” with a continuous chime
(until the speed is no longer e
xceeded).
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER MODE
MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure,
or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating,
electrical load reduction actions will take place to
extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle.
This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-
essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk of
battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may
stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart
after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
● The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a
diagnostic on the charging system continuously.
● If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
page 82
.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be affected
by load reduction:
● Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
● Rear Defroster and Heated Mirrors
● HVAC System
● 115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
● Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
● The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because the
electrical loads are larger than the capability of
the charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
● Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping, etc.).
● Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and
similar devices.
● Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
80 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
● The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
● The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
● The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
● The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights,
chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
● Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
● Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
● Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
● The v
ehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips,
and if the evaluation and driving pattern of the
vehicle did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message
and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as
such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or
alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will
display first if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and
a chime will sound
page 229.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault with the air bag, and will turn on
for four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with
a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or
that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark
on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible
brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on
until the condition has been corrected. If the problem
is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
3
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system
page 105.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a problem with the ETC system. If a problem
is detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending
on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when
the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the
transmission is placed in the PARK (P) position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with the
vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough
idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require
towing. The light will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL
(N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal within two minutes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service
page
271
.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open or not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the
hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
Trailer Brake has been disconnected
page 130
.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of
a high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster,
with the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
(Continued)
WARNING!
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will
flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position
and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
3
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated.
It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48
km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
● The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
● This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the Traction
Mode is set to Track or Full OFF in SRT Drive Modes.
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an authorized
dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid
yellow when the vehicle is approaching a
lane marker. The warning light will flash
when the vehicle is crossing the lane
marker
page 121.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low
page
286
.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2
gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a chime
will sound. The light will remain on until fuel
is added.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II
that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have
the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss
of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park
over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault in the Forward Collision Warning
System. Contact an authorized dealer for
service
page 225.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the ACC is not
operating and needs service
page 108.
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All-
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
Contact an authorized dealer.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Cruise Control System is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire
duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires
as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
3
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants
may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Low Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the AWD Low mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. AWD Low is designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only
page 99.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off
page 225
.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL
mode and the front and rear driveshafts are
disengaged from the powertrain.
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
when Trailer Merge Assist has been
activated
page 220.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is detected
page 108.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
Without Target Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and the
vehicle in front is not detected
page
108
.
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ECO mode is
active.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
page 107.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings have
been detected and the system is armed and
ready to provide visual and torque warnings
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
if an unintentional lane departure occurs
page
121
.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on
page 41.
Snow Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Snow mode is
active
page 101.
Sport Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Sport mode is
active
page 98.
Sport Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Sport mode is
active
page 206.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode
page 106
.
Tow Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Tow mode is
active
page 101.
Track Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Track mode is
active
page 207.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the corresponding
exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn
signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
● A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
● Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ACC has been
turned on, but is not set
page 108.
Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Custom mode
SRT is active
page 208.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but not set
page
107
.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
page 121
.
SRT Speed Warning Indicator Light — If
Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the
speed warning telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster with a number matching
the set speed. When the set speed is
exceeded, the indication will light up yellow and flash
along with a continuous chime. Speed Warning can be
turned on and off in the instrument cluster display
page 74
.
The number “55” is only an example of a speed that
can be set.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
3
Valet Mode SRT Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when Valet Mode is
active.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on.
With the low beams activated, push the
multifunction lever forward (toward the front
of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the
vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams
are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be driveable
and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
● Pr
olonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system.
It could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any
emissions tests can be performed.
● If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBO
ARD DIAGNOSTIC SY
S
TEM
(
OBD II)
C
YBERSECURIT
Y
Y
our v
ehicle is req
uired t
o ha
ve an OBD II and
a connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to access this
information to assist with the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle and emissions system
page 140.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y an authorized service technician should
connect eq
uipment t
o the OBD II connection por
t
in or
der t
o read the VIN, diagnose, or ser
vice y
our
v
ehicle.
● If unauthorized eq
uipment is connect
ed to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
(Continued)
WARNING!
○ Be possible that v
ehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal
requirement to pass an inspection of your
vehicle's emissions control system. Failure
to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is
running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD
II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may
fail the test.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
● The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
● The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or
replacement, you may need to do nothing more than
drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for
your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the
previously mentioned test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
3
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check
if
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and
if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their
seat belts.
WARNING!
● Bef
ore exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
● Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do no
t leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the PARK (P) position
before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
● Do not shift from REVERSE (R), PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior
to the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/
STOP button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. The
ignition will return to the OFF position.
2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds
or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition will remain in the ACC
position until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once with
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
instrument cluster will display a “
Vehicle Not In
Park” message and the engine will remain running.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut
off and the ignition will remain in the ACC position. If
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
vehicle may AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further
details.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to
an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ACC,
and RUN. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow
these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time to place the ignition to the RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
page 74
.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with
placing the vehicle in PARK (P) if the following
conditions occur. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
● Driv
er inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. If the "P"
indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK.
As an added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
● AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Ignition switched fr
om RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the engine
will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC
position. After 60 seconds, the ignition switches to OFF
automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition switch
OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmission
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
● Driver’s door is ajar
● Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift
To Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed
in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the gear
selector must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2
mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
4
The message “Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle
left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
4WD Low — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4WD Low.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when both
of these conditions are met:
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Driver’s door is ajar
The message “
AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed
in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue
until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver’s door
is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is
in PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has
not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat
the “Extended Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes,
then repeat the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not
experienced an extended park condition as defined
previously, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank
the engine for no more than 10 seconds. This should
clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the RUN position, release
the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
● Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle.
● If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly
page 268.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine f
or more than 1
0 seconds at a time.
W
ait 1
0 t
o 1
5 seconds bef
ore tr
ying again.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW –
22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
92 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BREAK-IN — NON-SRT
RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local
traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open
throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades see
page 334.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage ma
y result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level
with the engine oil indicator often during the break-in
period. Add oil as required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN – SRT
RECOMMENDATIONS
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum
performance and maximum durability for your new SRT
Vehicle.
This break-in occurs mainly during the first 500 miles
(805 km) and continues through the first oil change
interval.
It is recommended that the operator observe the
following driving behaviors during the new vehicle
break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
● Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
extended period of time.
● Press the accelerator pedal slowly and no more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
● Avoid aggressive braking.
● Drive with the engine speed below 3,500 RPM.
● Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h)
and observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
● Press the accelerator pedal slowly and no more than
halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower gears
(FIRST to THIRD gears).
● A
void aggressive braking.
● Drive with the engine speed below 5,000 RPM.
● Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h)
and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
● Exercise the full engine RPM range, shifting
manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher RPM when
possible.
● Do not perform sustained operation with the
accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
● Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h)
and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1,500 miles (2,414 km):
● Do not participate in track events, sport driving
schools, or similar activities.
NOTE:
Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval. Running the engine
with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe
engine damage.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK (P) position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, firmly push the parking brake pedal fully.
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
4
To release the parking brake, press the parking brake
pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the
brake disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON/RUN position, the Brake Warning Light
in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
● When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake Warning
Light will flash if vehicle speed is detected. A chime
will sound if the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8
km/h) to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
● This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism ma
y make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
● When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
● When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
● Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Alw
ays fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
● The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
(Continued)
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indicator
solidly indicates PARK without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
● It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
(N) if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.
If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
WARNING!
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE (R) only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
● Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE (D) when the engine is above idle speed.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P)
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position.
This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the
vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This
system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
the ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is locked in PARK when the ignition is
in the ACC position (engine will be off).
BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK
(BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
FUEL ECONOMY (ECO) MODE
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the
vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal driving
conditions. Push the ECO button in the center stack
of the instrument panel to enable or disable ECO mode.
Or ECO mode can be enabled or disabled through your
Uconnect system.
ECO OFF Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
4
● The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
● The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
● Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily
inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range is displayed both on the
gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a
gear range, push the lock button on the gear selector
and move the selector rearward or forward. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running
and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also
press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE
or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
● The transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred
miles (kilometers).
● In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving), the
position indicator will blink continuously until the
selector is returned to the proper position, or the
requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with
environmental and road conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerat
or pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (AutoStick)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using
the AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position), or
tapping the paddle shifters (+/-) (if equipped) will
manually select the transmission gear, and will display
the current gear in the instrument cluster
page
98
.
Transmission Gear Selector
1 — Gear Selector
2 — Lock Button
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
(beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick)
mode, the transmission gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Move the gear
selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle
is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on
a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with the electronically shifted
transfer case, ensure that the transfer case is in AWD
AUTO or LOW RANGE position on the AWD Control
Switch. Ensure that the NEUTRAL position light is NOT
illuminated.
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) mode is enabled, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
● Apply the parking brake.
● Shift the transmission into PARK.
● Turn the ignition OFF.
● Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
● DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
● When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on
the gear selector and firmly move the selector all the
way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
● Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
● With brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the v
ehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK (P)
if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
page 133.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
page 273.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all forward
gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the
AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear
page
98
. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm. Normal operation will
resume once the transmission temperature has risen
to a suitable level.
Manual (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position) enables full manual control of transmission
shifting (also known as AutoStick mode
page 98).
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually
select the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may
not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely
degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations,
the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
4
When exiting the vehicle, always:
serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be
necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
desired location (preferably, at an authorized dealer):
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your
transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset,
authorized dealer service is required.
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector (in
the MANUAL position), or the paddle shifters to the
MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE (D) position),
or tap one of the paddle shifters on the steering wheel.
Tapping the (-) paddle shifter to enter AutoStick mode
will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear,
while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain
the current gear. The current transmission gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
The paddle shifters (if equipped) may be disabled using
the Uconnect Personal Settings.
AutoStick mode has the following operational benefits:
● The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
● The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission
as the vehicle is accelerated.
● You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND
gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be
helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
● If a req
uested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
● The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
● Holding the (-) paddle pressed, or holding the
gear selector in the (-) position, will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
● Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
● The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE (D) position, or press and hold the (+)
paddle shifter until "D" is indicated in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode feature.
The engine, transmission, and steering systems are all
set to their SPORT settings. SPORT Mode will provide
improved throttle response and modified transmission
shift points for an enhanced driving experience, as well
as greater amount of steering feel. This mode may be
activated and deactivated by pushing the SPORT
button on the instrument panel switch bank.
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
SINGLE-SPEED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS/
PRECAUTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This system contains a single-speed (HI range only)
transfer case, which provides convenient full-time All-
Wheel Drive (AWD). No driver interaction is required.
The Brake Traction Control (BTC) System, which
combines standard ABS and Traction Control, provides
resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow
additional torque transfer to wheels with traction.
NOTE:
This system is not appropriate for conditions where
AWD LOW is recommended
page 137.
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER CASE —
IF EQUIPPED
This is an electronically shifted transfer case and it is
operated by the AWD control switch, which is located on
the center console.
AWD Control Switch
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three
positions:
● All-wheel drive auto range (AWD AUTO)
● All-wheel drive low range (AWD LOW)
● N (Neutral)
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
AWD LOW position can be used to lock the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by pushing the AWD LOW switch
page 100
. The AWD LOW position is designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the AWD
LOW position on dry, hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
Transfer Case Position Indicator
Messages
The T
ransfer Case Position Indicator message (AWD
LOW) is located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection
page 74
. When you select a different transfer case
position, the position indicator lights will do the
following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn off.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until
the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for
the selected position will stop flashing and remain
on.
If shift conditions are not met, one or more of the
following events may occur:
1. The indicator light for the current position will
remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met
page 100.
The “SERV AWD” Warning Light monitors the electronic
shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
after engine start-up or illuminates during driving, it
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
4
means that the all-wheel drive system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD” Warning Light
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in AWD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the AWD
AUTO position at a given road speed. Take care not to
overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40
km/h).
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the transfer case.
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate use of
each transfer case position, see the following:
AWD LOW
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range provides
low speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
N (Neutral)
This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle
page 133.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
SHIFTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
● If any of the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift. The position indicator light for the
previous position will remain on and the newly
selected position indicator light will continue to flash
until all the requirements for the selected position
have been met. To retry a shift: return the control
switch back to the original position, make certain all
shift requirements have been met, wait five seconds
and try the shift again.
● If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current position
indicator light will turn off, the selected position
indicator light will flash until the transfer case
completes the shift. When the shift is complete, the
position indicator light for the selected position will
stop flashing and remain on.
AWD AUTO To AWD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of AWD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the AWD LOW control
switch.
4. After the AWD LOW position indicator light is on
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into
gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition in ON/RUN position and engine
running, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push the AWD LOW control switch.
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. After the AWD LOW position indicator light is on
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into
gear.
NOTE:
● If steps 1 or 2 of either the “Preferred” or “Alternate
Procedure” are not satisfied prior to attempting the
shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift
attempt is in process, the desired position indicator
light will flash continuously while the original position
indicator light is on, until all requirements have been
met.
● The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not
in the ON/RUN position, then the shift will not take
place and no position indicator lights will be on or
flashing.
N (Neutral) Shift Procedure
For information regarding the transfer case N (Neutral)
shift procedure
page 135
.
TOW N GO — IF EQUIPPED
Tow N Go combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide
optimum performance for road conditions.
Push any one of the four drive mode buttons to select
the desired mode.
Drive Mode Buttons
1 — TRACK
2 — SPORT
3 — TOW
4 — SNOW
Tow N Go consists of the following positions:
●
TRACK – Optimizes settings for transmission, engine,
driveline, and suspension in order to maximize
vehicle performance. Also the electric power steering
offers more feedback of the tire gripping the road.
This feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
To turn off Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
page 217
.
●
SPORT – Dry weather, on-road calibration.
Performance based tuning that provides a rear-
wheel drive feel but with improved handling and
acceleration over a two-wheel drive vehicle. This
feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
●
TOW – TOW drive mode also optimizes the
transmission shifting for towing, as well as
maximizing straight line traction by optimizing
driveline settings on AWD system. Use this mode for
towing/hauling. Vehicle suspension will go to SPORT
mode. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is always enabled in
all drive modes provided that the ESC OFF indicator
light is not illuminated. TSC is disabled when the ESC
OFF lamp is illuminated. This feature will reset to
AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
●
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off-road on loose
traction surfaces such as snow. This feature will
reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
GUIDELINES FOR TRACK USE
NOTE:
The standard Black Brembo Brake Pads are not
recommended for track use. Only the Red Brembo
Performance SRT brake pads are appropriate for track
use.
● If your vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes, they
will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving
situations. It is recommended that your vehicle
operates in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track
event.
● Prior to each track event, verify all fluids are at the
correct levels.
● Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear
brake pads have more than half pad thickness
remaining. If the brake pads require changing,
complete a brake burnish procedure prior to track
outing at full pace.
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
4
NOTE:
Use of DOT 4 brake fluid is suggested for extended
track usage due to increased thermal capacity.
● At the conclusion of each track event, it is
recommended that a brake bleed procedure is
performed to maintain the pedal feel and stopping
capability of your Brembo High Performance brake
system.
● It is recommended that each track outing should
end with a minimum of one cooldown lap using
minimal braking.
● It is recommended to check oil temperature after
each track session. If the oil is still above 225°F
(107°C), do another cooldown lap if possible, or
keep the engine running and let idle until below
225°F (107°C), in order to prevent heat soaking of
the engine. Ensure temperature is reducing and do
not leave vehicle gauges unattended while idling just
after a track session.
● It is recommended that the suspension system,
brake system, prop shaft, and half shaft boots be
checked for wear or damage after every track event.
● Track usage results in increased operating
temperatures of the engine, transmission, driveline
and brake system. This may affect Noise Vibration
Harshness (NVH) countermeasures designed into
your vehicle. New components may need to be
installed to return the system to the original NVH
performance.
● Tire pressure:
○ R
ecommended tire pressure of 33 psi (230 kPa)
when tires are cold, or below 42 psi (290 kPa)
when hot.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you target below 42 psi
(290 kPa) when tires are hot at the conclusion of
each track session. Starting at 33 psi (230 kPa)
cold and adjusting based on ambient and track
conditions is recommended. Tire pressure can be
monitored via the instrument cluster display and
can assist with adjustments.
Track burnishing your brakes
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the
brake pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish
for factory-installed components or when new brake
friction components are installed:
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving
at 75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60 -
0.80g max without Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
intervention.
2. Complete one lap in this manner until you start
smelling the brakes. Continue for another half lap
at speed, then complete a two lap cooldown with
minimal brake applications. Ensure the brakes
are not smoking. If they are, complete another
cooldown lap.
3. Getting the brakes to smoke is an indication that
the brakes have overheated and may negatively
affect future track usage.
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool for at least 30
minutes. If an infrared thermal gun is available,
allow rotors to cool to 200°F (93.3°C) before
re
turning to the track.
5. There should be a thin layer of ash when
inspecting the brake pads. Having the ash layer go
more than half the thickness of the pad material is
a sign of an overly aggressive burnish.
6. Occasionally, a second burnish session is required.
If the brake pads begin to emit an odor during
the next track session, reduce vehicle speed and
braking deceleration rate to burnish targets and
follow steps 2-4.
7. New brake pads installed on old rotors require a
burnish. New rotors installed with old brake pads
should be burnished at the track or driven for
300 miles (485 km) of city driving to develop an
adequate lining transfer layer on the rotor surface
prior to track use.
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be
replaced.
NOTE:
Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended,
as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its
thermal capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor
cheek, making it less robust and increasing the
likelihood of pulsation in further track use.
SELEC-TRACK — IF EQUIPPED
Description
Selec-Track combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
Push the SRT button and the available drive modes will
show up on the radio touchscreen.
Selec-Track Buttons
1 — SRT
2 — LAUNCH
Refer to the Drive Modes for further information.
Selec-Track consists of the following positions:
●
SPORT – Dry weather, on-road calibration.
Performance based tuning that provides a rear-
wheel drive feel but with improved handling and
acceleration over a two-wheel drive vehicle. This
feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
●
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off-road on loose
traction surfaces such as snow. This feature will
reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
●
AUTO – Fully automatic full time four-wheel drive
operation can be used on and off-road. Balances
traction with seamless steering feel to provide
improved handling and acceleration over two-wheel
drive vehicles.
●
TRACK – Track road calibration for use on high
traction surfaces. Driveline is maximized for traction.
Some binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces.
This feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
●
TOW – Use for towing and hauling heavy loads.
Vehicle suspension will go to SPORT mode. Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) is enabled in the ESC system.
This feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
CUSTOM
Pushing the SRT button twice will put the vehicle into
Custom mode. This will allow the driver to create a
custom vehicle configuration that is saved for quick
selection of favorite settings. The system will return to
AUTO mode when the ignition switch is cycled from RUN
to OFF to RUN, if this mode is selected. While in Custom
Mode the Stability, Transmission, Steering, Suspension,
all-wheel drive set up, and Paddle shifter settings may
be configured through the Custom mode set-up.
NOTE:
Refer to the Drive Mode Supplement for further
information.
ACTIVE DAMPING SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled
damping system. This system reduces body roll and
pitch in many driving situations including cornering,
acceleration and braking. There are 3 modes:
● Street Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO,
SNOW and CUSTOM.) — Used during highway speeds
where a touring suspension feel is desired.
●
Sport Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO,
SPORT, CUSTOM and TOW.) — Provides a firm
suspension for better handling.
●
Track Mode (Available in terrain positions AUTO,
TRACK and CUSTOM.) — Provides a full firm
suspension for an aggressive track experience.
Refer to the Drive Mode Supplement for further
information.
LAUNCH CONTROL
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is
a form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The
system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions
may result in excess wheel slip outside this systems
control resulting in an aborted launch.
Preconditions:
● Launch Control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
area.
● Launch Control is not available within the first 500
miles (805 km) of engine break-in.
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
4
● Launch Control should only be used when the engine
and transmission are at operating temperature.
● Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
road surfaces only.
CAUTION!
Use on slippery or loose surfaces may cause
damage to vehicle components and is not
recommended.
Launch Control is only available when the following
procedure is followed:
NOTE:
Pushing the LAUNCH button on the instrument panel
will access Launch Control features. Please refer to the
Drive Mode Supplement for further information.
LAUNCH Button
1. Push the LAUNCH button on the instrument panel.
2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the
instrument cluster display. This screen will allow
you to adjust your launch RPM for optimum
launch/traction.
3. Press the "Activate Launch Control" button on
the instrument cluster display and follow the
instructions.
● Make sure the vehicle is not moving
● Put vehicle in Drive
● Steering wheel must be pointing straight
● Vehicle must be on level ground
● Apply brak
e pressure
● While holding the brake, rapidly apply and hold
the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The
engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set
in the “Launch RPM Set-up” screen
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument cluster
display to inform the driver if one or more of the
above conditions have not been met.
4. When the above conditions have been met, the
instrument cluster display will read “Release
Brake”.
5. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system will return to its current
ESC mode.
Launch Control will abort before launch completion and
display a "Launch Aborted" message in the instrument
cluster when any of the following occur:
● The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
● The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
● The ESC OFF button is pressed to change the system
to another mode.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do no
t have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
TORQUE RESERVE— IF EQUIPPED
Torque Reserve is automatically enabled in Brake
Torque Launch and Launch Control to reduce the time
required for the intake manifold to fill with air. Torque
Reserve opens the throttle delivering excess air. Torque
is controlled during this time by shutting fuel off to
multiple cylinders and retarding spark as necessary,
holding the potential torque in reserve. As soon as the
driver launches the car, fuel flow is restored and spark
is advanced to instantaneously deliver the reserve
torque. For a given launch engine speed, additional
torque is delivered more quickly than is possible with
manual control.
In Brake Torque Launch, the magnitude of reserve
produced depends on the driver's pedal torque request.
In Launch Control, the reserve magnitude depends on
the engine launch speed selected in the Race Options
menu.
Due to the way the engine is controlled during Torque
Reserve, a distinct exhaust note is generated and
engine vibration increases.
Brake Torque Launch with Torque
Reserve
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Torque Launch
with Torque Reserve that is designed to allow the driver
to achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a straight
line. This feature is intended for use during race events
on a closed course where consistent quarter mile (time)
and 0 to 60 (time) are desired. The Brake Torque
Launch with Torque Reserve feature is designed to
allow the driver to launch the vehicle with the benefit of
Torque Reserve, while maintaining control of the engine
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
speed during staging and the profile of the torque
delivered when launching. This feature is intended
for use during race events on a closed course when
additional launch torque is desired. The system is not
intended to compensate for lack of driver experience or
familiarity with the race track. Use of this feature in low
traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may result in
excess wheel slip outside this system control resulting
in an aborted launch.
Initial Conditions:
● Make sure the vehicle is not moving
● Put vehicle in Drive
● Steering wheel must be centered with tires pointing
forward
● Vehicle must be on level ground
● Vehicle at normal operating conditions
● Launch Mode not active
● Drive mode switch is in AUTO, SPORT, TRACK or
CUSTOM
○ In Custom mode, the All-Wheel Drive mode must
not be 50/50
● Apply adequate brake pressure with left foot
● Apply a steady throttle with the right foot to achieve a
desired engine speed above 1,350 RPM
● To launch, remove left foot from brake pedal while
maintaining or increasing throttle to launch with right
foot
NOTE:
Brak
e Torque Launch will abort if the engine speed
drops below 1,000 RPM, throttle is released or 10
seconds have elapsed while in Torque Reserve. Brake
Torque Launch is not recommended within the first 500
miles (805 km) of engine break-in.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system adapts to
different driving conditions and adjusts accordingly.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System
page 140.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is displayed
and the “Service Power Steering” or the “Power
Steering Assist Off – Service System” message is
displayed within the instrument cluster display, this
indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer
for service
page 81.
NOTE:
● Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
● If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “Power
Steering System Over Temp” message is displayed on
the instrument cluster screen, this indicates an over
temperature condition in the power steering system.
Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let
the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and
message turn off.
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
4
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is designed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or
pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically re-
start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
● The system must be in STOP/START READY state.
A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
page 74.
● The vehicle must be completely stopped.
● The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move
to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will
illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer
settings will be maintained upon return to an engine
running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES NOT
AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/
Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster
display Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations,
the engine will not stop:
● Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
● Driver’s door is not closed.
● Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
● Battery charge is low.
● The vehicle is on a steep grade.
● Cabin heating or cooling is in process and
an acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
● HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
● Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
● The transmission is not in a forward gear.
● Hood is open.
● Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
● Accelerator pedal input.
● Engine temperature is too high.
● 5 m
ph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved
from previous Autostop.
● Steering angle is beyond threshold.
● ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the items previously listed.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTOSTOP
MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
● The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
● To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
● HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
● Battery voltage drops too low.
● Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
● A Stop/Start system error occurs.
● Steering angle is beyond threshold.
106 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/START
SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and the autostop mode will
be disabled
page 74.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back
ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/START
SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “Service Stop/
Start System” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the instrument cluster display
page
81
.
If the “Service Stop/Start System” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
● Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
● In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
● Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable,
and vice versa.
CR
UISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
canno
t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
4
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the
instrument cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control
is on. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the
instrument cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system
or cause it to go faster than you want. You could
lose control and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET
(-) button and release. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a
speed has been set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what speed was
set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with the set speed,
will also appear and stay on in the instrument cluster
when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
● Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
● Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator
to pass as you would normally. When the pedal is
released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise
Control.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Cruise Control system without erasing
the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
● Vehicle parking brake is applied
● Stability event occurs
● Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
● Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position will erase the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling
108 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
The Cruise Control function performs differently
page 107.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect
a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
● If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
● Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will affect the performance of
the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision
Warning system.
● Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will
not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected
page 342.
WARNING!
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all
road conditions. Your complete attention is always
(Continued)
WARNING!
required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
● The ACC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
○ Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for two seconds in the stop position. If the
target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds the ACC system will display a message
that the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manually. An
audible chime will sound when the brakes are
released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
● When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
● When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
(Continued)
WARNING!
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
● When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
● When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase Button
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
4
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
until one of the following appears in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
● System Cancel
● Driver Override
● System Off
● ACC Proximity Warning
● ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
displa
y selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state,
the instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
● When in 4WD Low
● When the brakes are applied
● When the parking brake is applied
● When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
● When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
● When the brakes are overheated
● When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
● When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
● When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the A
daptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster
displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the
Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode (ACC not
enabled), the system will not react to vehicles ahead.
In addition, the proximity warning does not activate
and no alarm will sound even if you are too close
to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of
the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always
be aware which mode is selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph (32
km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20
mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
● Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER
OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
● If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be
controlling the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
● The brake pedal is applied
● The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
● The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
● The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
● The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
● The vehicle parking brake is applied
● The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
● The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
● The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
● Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
● Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
● The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
● The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
● The ignition is placed in the OFF position
● 4WD Lo
w is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will
show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32
km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being
used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0
km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
● While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the system
will cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes to
keep the vehicle at a standstill.
● ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure
to follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
4
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
● Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
● Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active:
● When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will aut
omatically slow the vehicle.
● The ACC system applies the brake down to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds
after coming to a full stop.
● The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed
change on moderate hills is normal. In addition,
downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or
descending downhill. This is normal operation and
necessary to maintain set speed. When driving
uphill and downhill, the ACC system will cancel
if the braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to
the vehicle ahead. This distance setting appears in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain
the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in
the same lane, the instrument cluster display will show
the ACC Set With Target Detected Indicator Light. The
system will then adjust the vehicle speed automatically
to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
● The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
● The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
● The distance setting is changed.
● The system disengages
page 110.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set
speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal and will only be active when passing on the
lef
t hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will
resume motion, without any driver interaction, if the
vehicle ahead starts moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes
will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning
chime. Driver intervention will be required at this
moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the
driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system
will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel
message will display on the instrument cluster display
and produce a warning chime. The driver must now
manually operate the vehicle’s accelerator and brakes.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will display this message and the system
will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels
with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance items:
● Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
4
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
● Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing
so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
and require a sensor realignment.
● If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged
due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for
service.
● Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
● If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstructions, have the radar sensor realigned
at an authorized dealer.
● Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and
inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display, and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance. This most often occurs at times of poor
visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The
ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due
to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield
and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument clust
er display will read “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system
will have degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system
will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on
the back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality
is no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstructions, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
display reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”
or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there
may be an internal system fault or a temporary
malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC
will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle.
If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may
need to intervene. The following are examples of these
types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only with an
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. Aftermarket trailer
brake controllers will not activate the trailer brakes
when ACC is braking.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle speed
for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve, the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending
on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
A
CC ma
y no
t de
t
ect a v
ehicle until it is com
ple
t
ely in
the lane in which y
ou are traveling. In the following
lane changing example, ACC has not yet detected the
vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle
until it's t
oo lat
e f
or the A
CC syst
em t
o tak
e action.
A
CC ma
y not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles.
For example, ACC will not react in situations where
the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider
this stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not
previously detect movement from it. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
4
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the
rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward
(e.g. during a parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes
may be automatically applied and released when
performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system
detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
● The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense
switch. The driver can also override automatic
braking by changing the gear or by pressing the gas
pedal over 90% of its capacity during the braking
event.
● Automatic emergency braking is not available if the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
● Automatic emergency braking will not be available
if there is a faulted condition detected with the
ParkSense Park Assist system or the Braking System
Module.
● The automatic emergency braking function may only
be applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough
to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
● The automatic emergency braking function may not
be applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left and/or
right sides.
● The aut
omatic emergency braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer Programmable
Features section of the Uconnect system.
● ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state for the automatic emergency braking function
through ignition cycles.
The rear automatic emergency braking function is
intended to assist the driver in avoiding possible
collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
● The rear automatic emergency braking system is for
emergency braking to avoid an imminent collision. It
is designed to assist the driver and not to substitute
the driver.
● The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system and recommendations,
see
page 120.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector
is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at
one of these gear selector positions, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is increased
to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
A display warning will appear in the instrument cluster
display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed
e
xceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
Six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia/
bumper (if equipped) and six ParkSense sensors (four
when vehicle is not equipped with front sensors)
located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area in
front and behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
field of view. The front sensors detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120
cm) from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can
detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
These distances depend on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the system will produce
a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2
second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
4
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance (in-
ches/cm)
Greater than 79 in-
ches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in-
ches (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance (in-
ches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches (120-100
cm)
39-25 inches (100-65 cm) 25-12 inches (65-30 cm) Less than 12 inches (30
cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle.
NOTE:
If the radio is on, ParkSense will reduce the volume of
the radio when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when
an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is
stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
● Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect system
page 140.
● The chime volume settings include low, medium, and
high.
● ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
page 74. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed
if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect
system
page 140.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pressed to disable the
system, the LED light on the switch will be illuminated.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster
display will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector is
moved to the DRIVE position, no warning message will
be displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. When the
system is disabled due to a fault, the LED light on the
switch will be illuminated. If the driver tries to press the
ParkSense switch to activate the system, the button will
blink for five seconds to show the request was received,
but cannot be fulfilled.
OPERATION WITH A TRAILER
For vehicles equipped with an Integrated Trailer Brake
Module (ITBM), the operation of the rear sensors is
automatically deactivated when the trailer's electric
plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket. The
front system is still functional, and the arcs will be
overlaid with a “Trailer” message. The rear sensors are
automatically reactivated when the trailer's cable plug
is removed.
When the vehicle is connected to a trailer, the
instrument cluster display will show the "Rear
ParkSense Unavailable Trailer Connected" message in
the following situations:
● For five seconds at vehicle start up
● For five seconds when the ParkSense button is
pushed, as long as an object is not detected in the
front
● As long as the vehicle is in REVERSE (vehicle graphic
displayed with a trailer overlay)
NOTE:
For more information on the Integrated Trailer Brake
Module, see
page 131.
For vehicles not equipped with ITBM, the automatic
braking may falsely be applied if a trailer is hooked up,
and Park Assist is not manually deactivated. It is also
possible, the trailer may be mistaken as a close object.
WARNING!
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnect
ed from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
4
WARNING!
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on
its size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System
has detected a fault condition, the instrument cluster
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and
it will display the "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear
Sensors", "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors",
or the "ParkSense Unavailable Service Required"
message for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a fault condition, the instrument
cluster display will display a "ParkSense Unavailable
Wipe Rear Sensors", "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe
Front Sensors" or "ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required" pop-up message for five seconds. After
five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed
with "Unavailable" at either the front or rear sensor
location depending on where the fault is detected.
The system will continue to provide arc alerts for
the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts
will interrupt the "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear
Sensors", "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors",
or "ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" messages
if an object is detected within the five second pop-up
duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensors" or
"ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors" appears
in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
authorized dealer.
If the "ParkSense Unavailable Service Required"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see
an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS
● Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
● Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
● When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
● When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
● P
arkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
● Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might not
detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
● Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches (30 cm)
of the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
● ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
WARNING!
● Driv
ers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
● Bef
ore using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● P
arkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera
to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the
form of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to drift out of the lane, the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning through
the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying force to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides visual
warnings through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only
a single lane marking is detected, a haptic or a torque
warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provide an audible warning
to the driver if removed. The system will cancel if the
driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state
on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane
drift condition through the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are
gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been
detected and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
4
System On (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
● When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense
telltale
is solid white when only the left lane
marking has been detected and the system is ready
to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
● When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/off),
and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid
white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow
Line With Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior
for a right lane departure when only the right lane
marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
● When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
turn from gray to white to indicate that both of the
lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense
telltale
is solid green when both lane markings
have been detected and the system is on to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display
and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
● When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line will turn solid yellow. The
LaneSense telltale
changes from solid green to
solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow
Line With Solid Yellow Telltale)
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
● When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow (on/off).
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow
to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the
lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow
Line With Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior
for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone
sensitivity (early/late) that you can configure through
the Uconnect system
page 140.
NOTE:
● When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
● The warnings are disabled with use of the turn
signal.
● The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock
Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic Stability
Control, Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back
Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the
gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera
is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears.
Manual Activation Of The Back Up Camera
1. Press the Vehicle Menu button located at the
bottom of the Uconnect display. Then select the
Controls tab.
2. Press the Rear View Camera button to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
3. Alternatively, the Rear View Camera feature can be
enabled b
y pressing the Rear View Camera button
in the App Drawer.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through
the Uconnect system
page 140. In certain radio
configurations, these modes of operation will be found
in the Camera section of the vehicle settings menu.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay
turned on, the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
REVERSE unless the following conditions occur: the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle
is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position, or the touchscreen X button to disable
the display of the Rear View Camera is pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected back up path based on the steering wheel
position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the
center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning
to a hitch/receiver. Different colored zones indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
4
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or
greater)
Rear View Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL
or DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be
activated with the Rear View Camera button
in the Controls tab of the Vehicle Menu. This
feature allows the customer to monitor the area directly
behind the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to
10 seconds while driving. If the vehicle speed remains
below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image
will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen X button.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
● T
o avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
● To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer
edge of the fuel door.
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside
the pipe seal the system.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors while
refueling.
Fuel Filler
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
4. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle
to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove the nozzle and push the fuel door all the
way in to secure it in place.
WARNING!
● Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
● Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
● A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and
rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH)
number is included on this label and indicates the
Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front
and rear (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR
and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in
the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready
for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately to
be sure that the load is properly distributed over the
front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show
that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has
been exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR and maximum Payload. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR,
maximum payload or the maximum front and rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it
can change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
4
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably
do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles
used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do
not exceed the GVWR
page 125.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR
page 125.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel
brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow small and
medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering
more consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control
(TSC) and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
● An im
properly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
● Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or
a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height
H1.
Measuring Height (H)
2. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
3. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground; this is height
H2.
4. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the front
fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2
the difference between H2 and H1 above normal
ride height [H1]).
NOTE:
This method is approximate. If available, use
scales for greater accuracy when setting the weight
distribution hitch, especially for trailer loads near
or at the maximum trailer weight rating.
5. The vehicle can now be driven.
Measurement Example Example Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,588 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
4
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with
tow haul mode engaged (if equipped).
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
For the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain see
page 128.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS) — NON-SRT
Engine GCWR Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
3.6L - RWD Light Duty Cooling 8,900 lb (4,037 kg) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
3.6L - RWD 11,600 lb (5,262 kg) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
3.6L - AWD Light Duty Cooling 8,900 lb (4,037 kg) 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) 350 lb (159 kg)
3.6L - AWD 11,600 lb (5,262 kg) 6,200 lb (2,812 kg) 620 lb (281 kg)
5.7L - RWD 13,100 lb (5,942 kg) 7,400 lb (3,357 kg) 740 lb (336 kg)
5.7L - AWD 13,100 lb (5,942 kg) 7,200 lb (3,266 kg) 720 lb (327 kg)
5.7L - AWD R/T Tow N Go 14,600 lb (6,622 kg) 8,700 lb (3,946 kg) 870 lb (395 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire And Loading
Information Placard page 312. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW).
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) — SRT
Engine/Transmission GCWR Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
6.2L Automatic 14,675 lb (6,656 kg) 8,700 lb (3,901 kg) 870 lb (395 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
● The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the
Tire And Loading Information Placard
page 312.
● The manufacturer does not recommend using the
Run Flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or towing a trailer.
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER REMOVAL —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch
receiver cover, this must be removed to access the
trailer hitch receiver (if equipped). This cover is located
at the bottom center of the rear fascia/bumper.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the
bottom of the hitch receiver cover a quarter turn
counterclockwise and pull bottom of the hitch
receiver cover outward (towards you).
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you)
then downwards to disengage the tabs located at
the top of the hitch receiver cover to remove.
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the cover after towing, repeat the procedure
in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover in
the bumper fascia prior to installation.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
4
Weight Distribution
WARNING!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the
fr
ont of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on
the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer
to sway severely side to side which will cause loss
of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
● The tongue weight of the trailer.
● The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
● The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load
on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading
Information Placard for the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle
page 316.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of the new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines are
recommended.
CAUTION!
● Do no
t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
● Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80
km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled Servicing
page 276. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
● Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
(Continued)
WARNING!
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
● When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or
damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission,
steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
● Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
● Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK (P). For four-wheel drive vehicles, make
sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N).
Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
● GCWR must not be exceeded.
●
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
● Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
● Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
● Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
● Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
● Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
● Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
● For further information
page 312.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
● Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
● An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
● Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
● Do no
t connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
● Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an ITBM for electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified with
electric trailer brakes and EOH systems. Some previous
EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left
to activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the manual
brake control lever is activated while the brake is also
applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the
power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes
are applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection
status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition
is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
4
sliding the manual brake control lever will display the
GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake
Status Indicator Light will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the Trailer
Brake Status Indicator Light will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments.
The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10
or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
control for the specific towing condition and should
be changed as towing conditions change. Changes to
towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road
conditions and weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally and properly
adjusted. See a trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the
electrical connections according to the trailer
manufacturer's instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged
in, the trailer connected message should appear in
the instrument cluster display (if the connection is
not recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will
not be available), the GAIN setting will illuminate
and the correct type of trailer must be selected
from the instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering
wheel until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to
enter “TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer
Brake Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type
appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a
dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–
40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake control
lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels
turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a
point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is
determined in the trailer connection, trailer brake
control, or on the trailer
page 74.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete
loss of trailer braking. There may be an increase in
stopping distance or trailer instability which could
result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete
loss of trailer braking. There may be an increase in
stopping distance or trailer instability which could
result in damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other
property.
NOTE:
● An aftermarket controller may be available for use
with trailers with air or EOH trailer brake systems.
To determine the type of brakes on your trailer and
the availability of controllers, check with your trailer
manufacturer or dealer.
● Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
may cause damage to the electrical system and
electronic modules of the vehicle. See an authorized
dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever pulling a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required
for motoring safety.
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
● Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s
electrical connectors) before launching a boat into
water.
● Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing
up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
If equipped with Tow N Go, it is recommended to place
the vehicle in tow mode by pushing the TOW button.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
AutoStick
● When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance
and avoids frequent downshifts. For example,
choose “5” if the desired speed can be maintained.
Choose “4” or “3” if needed to maintain the desired
speed.
● To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as
necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM.
Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade
and road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
● Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
● When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
● Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
4
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
All-Wheel Drive Models With Single-Speed Trans-
fer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed Transfer
Case
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
●
See Instructions:
● Transmission In PARK
● Transfer Case In N (Neutral)
● Tow In Forward Direction
Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
Recreational towing is not allowed on SRT vehicles.
● These vehicles may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are
OFF the ground.
● When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — REAR-WHEEL
DRIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat to
w this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed
ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for
towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight
position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME)
RECREATIONAL TOWING — ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
MODELS (SINGLE-SPEED TRANSFER CASE)
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a N (Neutral) position in the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously listed
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
MODELS (TWO-SPEED TRANSFER CASE)
The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral)
and the transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing. The N (Neutral) selection button is adjacent
to the transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and
out of transfer case N (Neutral) can take place with
the selector switch in any position. There is a Mopar®
Flat Tow Harness kit available to enable the Electronic
Power Steering (EPS) while flat towing the vehicle, to
provide more front axle stability. See an authorized
dealer for more information and installation.
NOTE:
If the Mopar® Flat Tow Harness kit is installed, the EPS
will use power from the battery to keep the EPS
powered during a flat tow. A battery charging system is
recommended so that the battery is not depleted over a
long trip.
CAUTION!
● DO NO
T dolly tow any AWD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON
the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle
trailer).
● Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to
the transfer case.
● The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
● Before recreational towing, be certain that the
transfer case is fully in N (Neutral)
page 135.
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
● Towing this vehicle in violation of the
previously listed requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
● Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
ground, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
● Steps 1 through 3 are requirements that must
be met before pushing the N (Neutral) button,
and must continue to be met until the shift has
been completed. If any of these requirements
are not met before pushing the N (Neutral)
button or are no longer met during the shift, the
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
4
N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the N
(Neutral) button is released.
● The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
● A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been
met.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
(located by the selector switch) for four seconds.
The light behind the N symbol will blink, indicating
shift in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay
on solid) when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL”
message will appear in the instrument cluster.
N (Neutral) Button
5. After the shift is completed and the N (Neutral)
light stays on, release the N (Neutral) button.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
9. Firmly apply the parking brake.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in
NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP
button until the engine turns off.
11. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK.
Release the brake pedal.
12. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice
(without pressing the brake pedal) to turn the
ignition to the OFF mode.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the
transfer case in N (Neutral) and the engine
running. With the transfer case in N (Neutral)
ensure that the engine is OFF before shifting the
transmission into PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it
connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
● Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must
be met before pushing the N (Neutral) button,
and must continue to be met until the shift has
been completed. If any of these requirements
are not met before pushing the N (Neutral)
button or are no longer met during the shift, the
N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the N
(Neutral) button is released.
● The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
● A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been
met.
136 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and
hold the recessed transfer case N (Neutral) button
(located by the selector switch) for one second.
N (Neutral) Button
7. When the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off,
release the N (Neutral) button.
8. After the N (Neutral) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by
the selector switch.
9.
Shift the transmission into PARK and turn the
engine off.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE,
release the brake pedal, and check that the
vehicle operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-RO
AD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional passenger cars any more than sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As
with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD Low — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD Low for additional
traction. This range should be limited to extreme
situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where
additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle
speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be
avoided when in 4WD Low.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD Low on dry pavement; driveline
damage may result. 4WD Low locks front and rear
drivelines together and does not allow for differential
action between the front to rear driveshafts. Driving
in 4WD Low on pavement will cause driveline binding;
use only on wet or slippery surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
water, there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior
to entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep
water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-
off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or
the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
4
avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing
water can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to
sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches
(51 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to ensure the fluids have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in
appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon as
possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a
low gear and shift the transfer case to AWD Low if
necessary
page 99. Only shift into a lower gear to
maintain forward motion. Over-revving the engine can
spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads,
because engine braking may cause skidding and loss
of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to AWD Low. Use
FIRST gear and AWD Low for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to
a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the
engine, and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the
hill, allowing the compression braking of the engine
to help regulate the speed. If the brakes are required
to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid
locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully
straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill; always
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest
of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward
motion by turning the front wheels slowly. This may
provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually
provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into AWD Low. Let the vehicle go slowly down
the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control.
Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the
transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle
than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it
is always a good idea to check for damage. That way
you can get any problems taken care of right away and
have your vehicle ready when you need it.
● Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension,
and exhaust system for damage.
● Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
● Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque
to the values specified in the Service Manual.
● Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide
damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals,
and propeller shafts.
● After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes
inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.
138 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your
brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
● If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels
for impacted material. Impacted material can cause
a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
4
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4
With 8.4-inch Display or Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-
inch Display systems, refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
● Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
● At vehicle start up, there may be a delay in certain
features such as Android Auto
™
and Apple CarPlay®.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working
with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate
steps as needed. As always, if you experience unusual
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately,
page 338, or refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for additional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y insert trusted media devices/components
into your vehicle. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software, and
if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
● As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, contact an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of
a security breach, vehicle owners should routinely
check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons
on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate
located on the center of the instrument panel. These
buttons allow you to access and change the customer
programmable features. Many features can vary by
v
ehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and change
settings. Push the center of the control knob one or
more times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display, push
and hold the Power button on the radio’s faceplate for a
minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
140 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Buttons
On The Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
For the Uconnect 4 With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu settings
screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system allows you
to access all of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
● Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
For the Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings
tab on the top of the touchscreen. In this menu,
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
● Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will display in the chosen
language. The a
vailable setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and the Instrument
Cluster. The available languages are English, Español, Italiano, and Français.
MULTIMEDIA 141
5
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the
setting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to
the screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the
setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The
available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and the Instrument
Cluster. The available languages are English, Français, Italiano, and Español.
Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set
it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Units
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Con-
sumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (SRT only) (HP [US], HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque”
(SRT only) (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
142 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Keyboard This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable keyboards are
“ABCDEF” Keyboard, “QWERTY” Keyboard, and “AZERTY” Keyboard.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and the Instrument
Cluster. The available languages are English, Français, Italiano, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows
for more customization with the radio display.
MULTIMEDIA 143
5
Setting Name Description
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the unit display. The available options are “Speed”
(MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK],
L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power”
(SRT only) (HP [US], HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque” (SRT only) (lb-ft or Nm) units of
measurement independently.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
144 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or
“Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will change the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Hey
Uconnect” and “Hey Dodge”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow voice barge-in to be turned on and off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on and off.
Key Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
options.
New Text Message Pop-Ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. This
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. This setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been
linked to the key fob.
Navigation Pop-Ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. This setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 145
5
Setting Name Description
Navigation Settings This setting will direct you to the Navigation settings within Navigation Mode.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Audio Settings This setting will take you to the Audio settings for the vehicle profiles.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Automatic Emergency Braking
This setting will take you to the selectable options for “Forward Collision
Warning” and “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity”.
146 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision system on or off. The “Off” setting
will deactivate the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system. The “Warning
Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected.
The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and
apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when
an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near”
setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is
at a far distance from the vehicle.
Active Lane Management Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide
lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and
“Late”.
Active Lane Management
This setting will alert the driver by vibrating the steering wheel and moving the
steering wheel when a lane departure is detected. The available options with-
in Active Lane Management are Lane Management “Vibration Only”, “Steer-
ing Assist Only”, and “Vibration + Steering Assist”; Lane Warning “Early”,
“Medium”, and “Late”; Vibration Strength “Low”, “Medium” and “High”; and
Steering Assist Strength “Low”, “Medium” and “High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
MULTIMEDIA 147
5
Setting Name Description
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
“Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
Electric Power Steering Default
This setting will change the Electric Power setting to “Normal”,” Sport”, or
“Comfort”.
Paddle Shifters This setting will turn the paddle shifters on or off.
LaneSense Warning — Located In LaneSense Submenu This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide
lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and
“Late”.
LaneSense Strength — Located In LaneSense Submenu This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a
lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert This setting will detect the length of a trailer. Auto will automatically detect the
length. Max sets all trailers to 39.5 ft. (12 meters).
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
148 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Rear Seat Alert
When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the
engine is running, or if the engine is turned on within 10 minutes of the door
opening, a message will appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is
powered OFF.
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in the instrument
cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Con-
sumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (SRT only) (HP [US], HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque”
(SRT only) (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
MULTIMEDIA 149
5
Clock/Clock & Date
When the Clock/Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will
control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will
decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Time This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available.
150 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or
smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings are “Auto
Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto
Reply Message” (create message).
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb All” settings menu. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
MULTIMEDIA 151
5
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will change the voice type during a Voice Recognition session. The availa-
ble options are “Male” and “Female”.
Voice Response Length This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The
“Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from the system. The “Detailed”
setting provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List
and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will
turn the Command List off.
Wake Up Word This setting will change the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are “Hey
Uconnect” and “Hey Dodge”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will turn the Voice Barge-in function on or off.
152 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 153
5
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors
will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
● When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
154 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
MULTIMEDIA 155
5
Setting Name Description
Remote Door Unlock/1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are
needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver
door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all
doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on
or off.
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been
linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Selectable settings are “On” and “Off”.
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has
been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut
off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
156 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started. If equipped, the only
selectable option will be “With Vehicle Start”.
Key Off/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off /Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when
the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seats This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut
off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Key Off Power Delay/Engine Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
MULTIMEDIA 157
5
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/
right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the
volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”,
“1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto On Radio This setting will turn the radio on with vehicle start and recall the last known radio
state. The available options are “On”, “Off”, and “Last Recall”.
Volume Adjustment This setting will let you adjust the volume levels for “Media”, “Phone”, “Navigation”,
and “VR” (Voice Recognition).
158 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Switches
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4
This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX switches.
There are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power source for the AUX
switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or from the “Ignition”. In addition to
setting the type and power source, you can set if the vehicle will recall the previous
state at which the AUX switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to
“On” or “Off”. Last state conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and the
power source is set to Ignition.
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the “App Favorited” pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the “App Unfavorited” pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected
phone on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 159
5
Setting Name Description
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone
on or off.
Navigation Pop-ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-ups on or off.
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific
radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
● A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profiles, & Settings This setting will direct you to the SiriusXM® profile settings.
Block Explicit This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On”
and “Off”.
Tune Start This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display
of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
160 MULTIMEDIA
Accessibility
When the Accessibility button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the option related to the vehicle’s theater system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Accessibility
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the action select-
ed when using DVD/Blu-ray™ and USB Video functions, when it is activated. For
example, when activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will announce
“play button selected”, and then once pressed again the Play button will perform its
action.
Software Update
When the Software Update button is selected, the system will display a menu with possible Wi-Fi connections. From this page, you can select and connect to one of the
available Wi-Fi networks to begin system software updates. To begin, make sure the system is set to allow for Wi-Fi updates.
1. Select the desired Wi-Fi network from the available list.
2. Enter the Wi-Fi password. If the password is entered incorrectly, the system will display a notification that the connection failed.
3. Once connected, the system will begin scanning for any system updates. Press the Stop Scan button to end this process.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
System Information — If Equipped
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 161
5
Setting Name Description
Version Information When this feature is selected, the radio version build will be displayed.
License Information
When this feature is selected, a software license screen will appear, displaying the
system software version.
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can
clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the App Drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Apps This setting will delete all installed Apps on the vehicle.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection This setting will reset the password used for the in-vehicle Wi-Fi.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
162 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
1 — Radio/Media Button 5 — Navigation Button (If Equipped)
2 — Climate Button 6 — Phone Button
3 — Apps Button 7 — Settings Button
4 — Controls Button
MULTIMEDIA 163
5
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and access the radio functions and external audio
sources
page 166.
Phone
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone system
page 179.
Settings
Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings
page 140.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary
knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
164 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover
the radio screen from freezing.
BACK Push the BACK button on the faceplate to go back to a previous screen in the headunit.
MUTE/VOLUME Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the MUTE/VOLUME button on the faceplate to mute or unmute the system.
Feature Description
Controls — If Equipped Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Mobile apps.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate control functions
page 46.
Feature Description
Nav (Navigation) — If Equipped Press the Nav button to enter Navigation Mode and use the system’s built-in Navigation software.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu
bar are easily customized for your preference. Simply
follow these steps:
MULTIMEDIA 165
5
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With
8.4-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen.
2.
Press and hold, then drag the select
ed app t
o
replace an e
xisting shor
tcut in the main menu bar
.
NO
TE:
This f
eature is only a
v
ailable if the v
ehicle is in PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Only use and interact with the features and
(Continued)
WARNING!
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Please read this manual carefully before using the
system. It contains instructions on how to use the
system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure
to do so may result in injury or property damage.
● Become familiar with the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle before you drive on the
roadway so using Uconnect will be more intuitive and
will not require prolonged viewing of the screen while
you are driving.
● When driving, looking at the touchscreen should only
be done by a glance when safe to do so. If prolonged
viewing of the screen is required, choose a safe and
secure location where you can pull over and park
safely to do so.
● Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to
do so may cause injury or damage to the product.
See an authorized dealer for repair.
● Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic and
emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
● The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic
device. Do not let young children use the system.
● P
ermanent hearing loss may occur if you play your
music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise
caution when setting the volume on the system.
● Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from the system. Besides damage to the
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as with
any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed dependent. For
your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
● Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp
objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could
scratch the surface.
● Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the
screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning
cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
● If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with
a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or
an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of
50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's
precautions and directions
page 342.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
166 MUL
TIMEDIA
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are
in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune t
o the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track
on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing
the switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing
the bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current
track, or the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play. Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip
to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into the
current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — Map
3 — View Next Preset Radio Station
4 — Status Bar
5 — Browse
6 — Source Select (If Equipped With 4C/4C NAV)/
Radio Bands
7 — Seek Down
8 — Tune
9 — Seek Up
10 — HD Radio™ (If Equipped)
11 — Audio Settings
12 — Bottom Menu Bar
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
● AM
● FM
● SiriusXM® Sat
ellit
e Radio (If Eq
uipped)
Press the Radio butt
on
or Media butt
on
on the
t
ouchscreen t
o ent
er the Radio Mode. The dif
ferent
tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected
by pressing the corresponding button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on and
off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the VOLUME & On/Off control knob clockwise increases
the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
MULTIMEDIA 167
5
If equipped, your radio has the ability to perform a
forced reset. This can be achieved by pushing and
holding the VOLUME & On/Off control knob for 10
seconds. This feature is helpful if the radio freezes or
crashes.
Mute Button
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio
station frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to
choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by
pressing the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen
to the right and left of the radio station display or by
pushing the left steering wheel audio control button up
or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available station or
channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio
stops at the next available station or channel when the
button on the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or Seek
Down
button will scan the different frequency
bands at a slower rate.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio station
or channel.
Press the available number button on the touchscreen
to begin selecting a desired station. Once a number
has been entered, any numbers that are no longer
possible (stations that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the Back
button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press
“Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system
will automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like to
hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
on the steering wheel and wait
for the beep to say a command. See an example:
● “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
● “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what
to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the
VR button and say “Help”. The system provides you
with a list of commands.
HD Radio™ — If Equipped
HD Radio™ technology is the digital evolution of analog
AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver, which
allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available)
in addition to the analog broadcasts. Digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio with no static or
distortion.
For more information and a guide to available stations
and programming, please visit hdradio.com.
To begin using HD Radio™:
1. Press the Media Button.
2. Select the AM or FM tab.
3. Select the HD button.
When HD Radio™ reception is enabled and a station
with HD Radio™ broadcasts is playing, the following
indicators may appear on the screen:
●
HD Radio™ Logo: This indicator will display in gray
when a digital station is being acquired and will
appear in orange and white when digital audio is
playing. When this logo is available, you will also see
Station Call Sign (e.g. WNIC), Title and Artist fields on
screen.
●
Multicast Indicator (1 2 3...): These numbers will
appear if the current station has multiple digital
broadcasts. Press the Seek Up or Down button
repeatedly to access the other digital broadcasts.
168 MULTIMEDIA
The numbers that are highlighted signify available
digital channels where new/different content is
available. HD1 will signify the main programming
service and is available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Any additional multicast stations (HD2-
HD8) are only broadcast digitally.
●
Album Art/Station Logo: Some HD Radio™ stations
broadcast station logos and album art associated
with the song being played as part of the HD Radio™
broadcast service. Station logo art is stored in the
radio and may take up to five minutes to learn
for each station that supports station logo service.
Album art is broadcast at the beginning of songs. If
tuning into the middle of a song, the art may not be
available.
When HD Radio™ broadcasts are active, you can
access the following functions:
●
Seek Up And Down: Press to seek to the next strong
radio station. If the current station has multiple
digital broadcasts, the multicast indicator numbers
will display. Press “Seek” repeatedly to advance
through all available broadcasts. If you are on the
last multicast channel, press “Seek Up” to advance
to the next strong station.
●
Saving A Multicast Station As A Preset: When the
channel is active on-screen, press and hold a Preset
button; it will save the station to the available
slo
t. When recalling an HD2-HD8. memory preset,
there will be a momentary mute before the digital
audio is played as the system acquires the digital
signal. If you have turned this feature off, this will
automatically turn on HD Radio™ broadcasts and will
tune to the selected frequency. As with any saved
radio station, you will not be able to access the
saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s
reception area.
●
“LIVE” Ballgame Mode Broadcasts: If a station
has a live broadcast (such as a baseball game),
“LIVE” may appear on screen beside the multicast
numbers. These are analog broadcasts with digital
components (i.e. artist, title). If HD1 is in a live
broadcast mode, the HD Radio™ logo will be gray.
You will hear analog audio; the user will still be able
to tune to the multicast channels.
Reception Area: If you are listening to a multicast (HD2-
HD8) station and you are on the fringe of the reception
area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system will simply switch
to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is
available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible
multicast (HD2-HD8) channels, the station will mute
and stay muted unless it is able to connect to the digital
signal again. While in this state, the text “buffering” will
appear for 30 seconds. If it is not able to reconnect to
the digital signal, the screen will be cleared and “HD
Radio™ Signal Unavailable” will appear in artist and
title field area.
Station Blending: When an HD1 station is received,
the system will play the analog audio broadcast
from the station for a few seconds and then, if the
receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio™ station,
it will transition to play the digital audio broadcast.
Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight
sound change when the station transitions from analog
to the digital broadcast. The shift from analog to digital
or digital back to analog sound is known as “blending”.
Station Issues: In order to provide the best possible
experience, a contact form has been developed to
report any station issues found while listening to a
station broadcasting with HD Radio™ technology. Every
station is independently owned and operated. These
stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate. This form can be found at
https://hdradio.com/stations/feedback/.
MULTIMEDIA 169
5
Troubleshooting
Experience Cause Action
Mismatch of time alignment — a user may hear a short
period of programming replayed or an echo, stutter, or
skip.
The radio station’s analog and digital volume is not prop-
erly aligned or the station is in ballgame mode.
None. It is a radio broadcast issue. The user can contact
the station.
Sound fades, blending in and out. Radio is shifting between analogue and digital audio. Reception issue: It may clear up as the vehicle continues
to be driven. Turning off HD Radio™ can force the radio
to use analogue audio.
Audio mute condition when an HD2-HD8 multicast chan-
nel is playing.
The radio does not have access to digital signals at the
moment.
This is normal behavior. Wait until the digital signal re-
turns. If out of coverage area, seek a new station.
Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2-HD8 multicast
channel preset.
The digital multicast content is not available until HD
Radio™ broadcast can be decoded and make the audio
available. This can take up to seven seconds.
This is normal behavior. Wait until the audio is available
again.
Text information does not match the present song audio
or no text information shown for the present selected
frequency.
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster. Broadcaster should be notified. Use the form at https://
hdradio.com/stations/feedback/
HD Radio™ Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. US and Foreign Patents. For patents, see http://dts.com/patents. HD Radio™, Artist
Experience, and the HD, HD Radio™, and "ARC" logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
170 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-
inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
NOTE:
Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song and
artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune start, and
others.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-
receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear,
coast-to-coast radio content. SiriusXM® is a
subscription-based service.
Visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review
your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new vehicle
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription,
US residents visit
https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/
getlogin or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or
call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located
at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM
button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
● The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
● The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of
the screen.
● The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the
center.
● The Program Information is displayed at the bottom
of the Channel Number.
● The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below
the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct
Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions common
to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/Weather
button, and Favorite button functions are available in
SiriusXM® Mode.
MULTIMEDIA 171
5
purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the
end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will
automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until
you call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM®
satellite service is available only to those at least
18 and older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our
SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in Canada
and Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM®
Internet radio service is available throughout their
satellite service area and in AK. © 2023 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios equipped
with a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite
radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view
to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might have
to change the vehicle’s position in order to receive
a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does not
receive a signal in underground parking garages or
tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the radio
does not have the necessary subscription, the radio is
able to receive the Preview channel only.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-
inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Traffic & Weather Button (If Equipped)
7 — Audio Settings Button
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to 22
minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio.
Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory
is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/
P
ause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at
the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can be
resumed b
y pressing the P
ause/Pla
y butt
on again on the t
ouchscreen.
R
e
wind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind button
on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the
content can only be done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins playing the
content at the point at which the press is released.
172 MULTIMEDIA
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live content.
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out within
20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist
or song that is currently playing. The radio then uses
this information to alert you when either the favorite
artist or song is being played at any time by any of the
SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in
the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on the
touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on the
touchscreen.
TRAFFIC & WEATHER — AVAILABLE ON THE 4C
NAV (IF EQUIPPED)
Press the Traffic & Weather button on the touchscreen
to tune to a SiriusXM® Traffic and Weather channel. To
set a Traffic & Weather alert for any one of the cities in
the Jump Browse list
page 173.
If the Traffic & Weather alert city is not set, you are
presented with a pop-up to allow you to select the
favorite city using the Browse screen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With
8.4-inch Display Browse Button
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit
Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings,
along with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit
submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the
Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When
pressing the All button, the following categories become
available:
●
Channel List: Press the Channel List to display all
the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the
Channel List by pressing the Up and Down arrows,
located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can
also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
●
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the
touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You can
select any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List.
The radio tunes to a channel with the content in the
selected Genre.
MULTIMEDIA 173
5
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at the
left of the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/
SCROLL knob as well.
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button
on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently
highlighted Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to
the station stored in the Preset.
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen
by pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding
preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings, along
with providing a list of Channels currently airing any of
the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/
SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The
Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from “Alert
me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score
update” or both when one or more of your selections is
airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
of the 12 presets. This feature occurs the first time the
preset is selected during that current song.
Saving Presets To A Driver Memory
Profile — If Equipped
After setting/changing the desired radio presets,
your updates will be saved under the current active
profile automatically. Seat alignment will not be saved
automatically.
174 MULTIMEDIA
to delete all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon
next to the Favorite to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose
from a visual alert or audible and visual alert when
one of your favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the
Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability
to select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air
list provides a list of Channels currently airing any of
the items in the Selections list, and pressing any of the
items in the list tunes the radio to that channel.
Select Team — If Equipped
Press the Select Team button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league
and a scroll list of all teams within the league will
appear, then you can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all teams
that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen
to delete all of the selections or press the Trash Can
icon next to the selection to be deleted.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With
8.4-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are
activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located
at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as
a preset, press and hold the numbered button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio
Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You
can switch between the radio presets list by pressing
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by pressing
the X button or the Back Arrow button when in the
Browse Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main menu
to activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the Radio
Mode screen by pressing the Audio button. You can
return to the Radio screen by pressing the X button.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
MULTIMEDIA 175
5
the Arrow button located in the upper right of the radio
t
ouchscreen.
PRESET FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides
a means to edit the Presets List and is entered by
pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the
preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL knob or by
pressing the Up or Down Arrow key, located on the right
of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed
Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button
or the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently
highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in
the Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen
by pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding
preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio
between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker icon to
adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or - button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of
the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for
normal road noise.
Surround Sound
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre
system.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value,
which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media
USB ports, when it is turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened or until
the “Radio Off Delay” selected time has expired.
176 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With
8.4-inch Operating Media Mode
1 — Repeat
2 — Source Select (If Equipped With 4C/4C NAV)
3 — Track Time
4 — Info
5 — Shuffle
6 — Browse
7 — Tracks Browse
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source
Select button on the touchscreen and the desired mode
button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth®
are the Media sources available. When available, you
can select the Browse button on the touchscreen to be
given these options:
● No
w Playing
● Ar
tists
● Albums
● Genres
● Songs
● Pla
ylists
● F
older
s
Y
ou can press the Sour
ce, P
ause/Pla
y
, or the Inf
o
butt
on on the t
ouchscreen for artist information on the
current song playing.
Types of Media Modes
USB Mode
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into the
USB port, by selecting the USB button on the left side
of the touchscreen, or by selecting the Source Select/
Select Source button and then selecting USB 1 or 2 (if
equipped).
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is
entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing
music, to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the
Uconnect system.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth®
butt
on on the left side of the touchscreen or under the
Source Select/Select Source button (if equipped).
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With
8.4-inch Display Source Select
MULTIMEDIA 177
5
AUX Mode
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the
AUX port, or by pressing the AUX button on the left side
of the touchscreen or under the Source Select button (if
equipped).
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary
device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary
device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will
switch to AUX Mode and begin to play.
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the
AUX port or by pressing the AUX button on the left side
of the touchscreen, or under the Source Select button
(if equipped).
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume
control on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will
be insufficient audio signal for the radio unit to play the
music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device.
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current
selection, or to return to the beginning of the previous
selection if the USB device is within the first three
seconds of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up
button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the
first second of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB
Mode, the left side of the browse window displays a list
of ways you can browse through the contents of the
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
USB device. If supported by the device, you can browse
by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the
desired button on the touchscreen on the left side of
the screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and their sub-functions, which can be scrolled
through by pressing the Up and Down buttons to the
right. The TUNE/SCROLL knob can also be used to
scroll.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source: USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source: AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The
Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted when
active. The Radio will continue to play the current track,
repeatedly, as long as the repeat is active. Press the
Repeat button again to enter Repeat All. The radio will
continue to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as
long as the repeat function is active. To cancel Repeat,
press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB device in
random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen a second
time to turn this feature off.
176 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Audio
button page 167.
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the touchscreen
to display the current track information. Press the Info
or X button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel
this feature.
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the
touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The
song currently playing is indicated by an arrow and lines
above and below the song title. When in the Tracks List
screen you can rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
highlight a track (indicated by the line above and below
the track name) and then push the ENTER/BROWSE
knob to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports
this feature, press the Tracks button on the
touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by a red arrow and
lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while
the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and
auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices.
● “Change source to Bluetooth®”
● “
Change source to AUX”
● “
Change source to USB”
● “
Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;
“Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device.
Your Voice Command must match exactly how the
artist, album, song, and genre information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. It allows you to dial a
phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
● Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
● Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
● Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of
18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text
messages.
● Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
● Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
● Vie
wing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,”
“Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” or
“Show Recent Calls”).
● Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
● Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
● Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
● Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
● Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
● Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
● Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
● US visit
UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400
● Canada visit
UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or
exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's
micr
ophone for private conversation.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that
enables different electronic devices to connect to each
other without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and has
been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile
phones or audio devices are allowed to be linked to
the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone
and one audio device can be used with the system at a
time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing
calls, view phonebook, etc. When you push
the button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal
to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when
you are already in a call or want to make
another call.
MULTIMEDIA 179
5
Push the VR button located on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the
prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith
mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system
to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
● Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or
another prompt.
● For certain operations, compound commands can
be used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and
then “John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John Smith
mobile.”
● For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts
and say each part of the command when you are
asked for it. For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for John
Smith,” or you can break the compound command
f
orm into two voice commands: “Search Contacts”
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please remember,
the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in
a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to
Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context
and provides the associated follow-up prompt such
as “Who do you want to call?” in the case where a
phone call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system
requires more information from the user, it will ask
a question to which the user can respond without
pushing the Voice Command button on the steering
wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push
the Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and
say a command or say “Help”. All Phone sessions begin
with a push of the VR button or the Phone button.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button on
your steering wheel when the system is listening for
a command and be returned to the main or previous
menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
To begin using your Uconnect Phone,
you must pair your compatible
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Mobile phone pairing is the process
of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the
Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please
visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone
compatibility information.
180 MULTIMEDIA
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice
Command features if your vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect Phone
prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice
Command works:
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
NOTE:
● You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
● The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
● If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
● This pop-up only appears when the user enters
Phone Mode and no other device(s) have
previously been paired. If the system has a
phone previously paired, even if no phone is
currently connected with the system, this pop-
up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4.
Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®-
enabled mobile phone.
● Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
● Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
search for Bluetooth® connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the
PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a
mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing or Settings
button from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
● Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices
button and then press the Paired Phones
button.
● Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect” and
accept the connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the
connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite phone.
Selecting “
Yes” will make this phone the highest
priority. This phone will take precedence over other
paired phones within range and will connect to
the Uconnect system automatically when entering
the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the Uconnect
system will reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The most recent phone paired will
have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-
up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to
access your “messages” and “contacts”. Selecting “Ok”
or “Allow” will sync your contacts with the Uconnect
system.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired
Phones” to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection.
If this happens, simply repeat the pairing process.
However, first make sure to delete the device from the
list of phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure
to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
MULTIMEDIA 181
5
PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
DEVICE
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen to
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®-
enabled audio device. When prompted on the
device, confirm the PIN shown on the Uconnect
screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite device.
Selecting “Yes” will make this device the highest
priority. This device will take precedence over other
paired devices within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the device
priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The most recent device paired will have the
higher priority.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired
Phones” to bring up a list of paired audio devices.
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you need to choose a particular phone
or audio device follow these steps:
1. Press the Phone Pairing button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices button
and then press the Paired Phones or Audio
Sources button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices button
and then press Paired Phones or Audio Sources
button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the
device name for a different phone or audio device
than the currently connected device or press the
preferred Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device
button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen, press
the Settings button located to the right of the
device name for a different phone or audio device
than the currently connected device or press the
preferred “Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device move
to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
182 MULTIMEDIA
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
the ability to download contact names and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific
Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may
support this feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect system
to access your messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok”
or “Allow” will sync your contacts with the Uconnect
system.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for
supported phones.
● To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook
page 186.
● Automatic download and update of a phonebook,
if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth®
wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect
Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.
● A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
● Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before the
latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if
available, the previously downloaded phonebook is
available for use.
● Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
● This do
wnloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only
be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are
transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the
next phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the
Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then
press one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons
that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and then
select the appropriate number. Press the Down
Arrow button or the Settings Gear button next to
the selected number to display the option’s pop-
up. In the pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the Settings
Gear icon next to the contact you want to remove
from your favorites. This will bring up the options
for that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-
way calling, this feature can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service
provider for the features that you have.
Here are the phone options with Uconnect:
● Redial
● Dial by pressing in the number
● Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
● Favorites
● Mobile Phonebook
● Recent Call Log
● SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
MULTIMEDIA 183
5
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
1 — Answer
2 — Ignore/Decline
3 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls
Other phone call features include:
● End Call
● Hold/U
nhold/R
esume
● Sw
ap tw
o activ
e calls
KEY P
AD NUMBER ENTR
Y
1
.
Press the Phone butt
on.
2.
Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
● All Calls
● Incoming Calls or Calls Received
● Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
● Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls
button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel
and perform the operation. For example, say “Show my
incoming calls”.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the current
call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones
for call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Push the Phone button on the steering
wheel, press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or
press the Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system
in the market today do not support rejecting an
incoming call when another call is in progress.
Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call
or ignore it.
184 MULTIMEDIA
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your
eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your
convenience, there is a counter display to keep track
of your missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an incoming
call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
● “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly”.
● Create a custom auto reply message up to 160
characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be
selected so you can still place a second call without
being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
● Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhone® devices.
● Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access
Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
button on the Phone main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PR
OGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from
the keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent
calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen.
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle between
the active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone
main screen to combine all calls into a conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
T
o end a call in progress, momentarily press the End
Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button
on the steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become
the new active call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the
“Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on
the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until
the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth®
connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer
button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without terminating
the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your
connected mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone main
screen.
MULTIMEDIA 185
5
● Always wait for the beep before speaking
● Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away
from you
● Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during
a voice command period
● Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
● Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
● Low Road Noise
● Smooth Road Surface
● Fully Closed Windows
● Dry Weather Conditions
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not always
work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in your
Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized when
the entries are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”)
for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
● Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
● Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
● Low Road Noise
● Smooth Road Surface
● Fully Closed Windows
● Dry Weather Conditions
● Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answ
ering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone
compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to say
a command. Here are some examples:
● “
Call John Smith”
● “
Dial 123 456 7890”
● “
Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
● “
Call back” (call previously answered incoming
phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push
the Phone button
and say “Call”, then pronounce
the name
exactly as it appears in your phonebook.
When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can
say “Call John Smith wor
k”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages. Push
the VR button or Phone button and say:
1. “
Listen” to have the system read an incoming text
message. (Must have compatible mobile phone
paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has been
read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the predefined messages and follow
the system prompts.
186 MULTIMEDIA
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60> mi-
nutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need direc-
tions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided table.
Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to
take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP,
visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further information
on how to enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®,
refer to your iPhone® “User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes
Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to
your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your
voice to send text messages, select media, place phone
calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language
to understand what you mean and responds back to
confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep
your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by
letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering
wheel. After you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri
to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text
messages, and many other useful requests.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect
Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be re-established by restarting the mobile
phone. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth® ON Mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language change,
you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the
system
page 342.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF
EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED?
If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS
button are connected vehicles. These buttons will be
located on either the rearview mirror or overhead
console, depending on the vehicle. If these buttons are
present in your vehicle, you have a connected radio
and can take advantage of the many connected vehicle
features.
For further information about the ASSIST and SOS
buttons
page 260.
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
SERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s Uconnect
system is that you can now take advantage of Brand
Connect connected services. To unlock the full potential
of Brand Connect in your vehicle, you first need to
activate Brand Connect connected services.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Only use and interact with the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
MULTIMEDIA 187
5
NOTE:
Brand Connect involves the collection, transmission
and use of data from your vehicle
page 201.
Brand Connect Contact Information
Brand Connect/Care
● US residents visit:
https://www.driveuconnect.com/
or call 1-833-616-7527
● Canadian residents visit:
https://
www.driveuconnect.ca/en or call 1-833-648-1611
What Is Brand Connect?
Brand Connect uses an embedded device in the
Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, which
receives GPS signals and communicates with the
Brand Connect Customer Care center via wireless and
landline communications networks. Depending on the
type of device in your vehicle, some Brand Connect
connected services require an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network compatible with your device.
Brand Connect is available only on equipped vehicles
purchased within the continental United States, Alaska,
Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada.
NOTE:
● Certain Brand Connect connected services are
dependent upon an operative telematics device, a
cellular connection, navigation map data, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability
to reach the response center or reach emergency
support.
● Not all features of Brand Connect are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas.
● Other f
actors outside the control of Brand Connect
that may limit or prevent service delivery are hills,
structures, buildings, tunnels, weather, damage to
the electrical system or other important parts of
your vehicle, network congestion, civil disturbances,
actions of third parties or the government, Internet
failure, and/or the physical location of your vehicle,
such as in an underground parking structure or
under a bridge.
Not all Brand Connect features are available for all
models.
Brand Connect provides:
● The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere by using the
Vehicle Branded App or your computer.
● If equipped — Send & Go capability with the Vehicle
Branded App. Use the Vehicle Branded App to easily
search, map and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
● The ability to locate your vehicle, when you forget
where you parked, using the Vehicle Finder function
of the Vehicle Branded App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-
use Uconnect system and Brand Connect connected
services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your Rearview
Mirror Or Overhead Console
If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for contacting
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, and
Brand Connect Customer Care. The SOS Call button
connects you directly to Brand Connect Customer Care
for assistance in an emergency.
Activation — If Equipped
T
o unlock the full potential of Brand Connect in
your vehicle, you must activate your Brand Connect
connected services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-
vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of
apps.
3.
For customers in the United States, select
“Customer Care” to speak with a Brand Connect
Customer Care agent who will activate services in
your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate on
the web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email address
to activate services in your vehicle.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial*
period for use of Brand Connect connected services
starting on the date of vehicle purchase. To get started
with your trial, enrollment in Brand Connect is required.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a subscription
to continue your services by calling a Brand Connect
Customer Care agent.
188 MULTIMEDIA
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
VEHICLE SERVICES
Download The Vehicle Branded App
Once you have activated your services, you’re only a few
steps away from using connected services.
● Download the Vehicle Branded App to your mobile
device.
● Use your Owner Account login and password to open
the app and then set up a PIN.
● For customers in the United States, if your vehicle
is not registered at the dealership, you will have to
call the Customer Care call center from inside your
vehicle or press the in-vehicle registration button.
From there, you will be able to register your vehicle
and add your vehicle’s VIN to your account.
● F
or customers in Canada, register your account via
your vehicle.
1. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu bar.
2. Press the Activate Services button from the
apps list.
3. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confirmation
email will be sent to the provided email
address.
4. Press “Continue Activation” from the
confirmation email. It may take a short time
before remote services will be available, but you
will be able to log into the Vehicle Branded App
and the Owner’s Site.
● Once on the Remote screen and you have set up
your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote Door
Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate
your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
● Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar
of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle
or send a location to your Mobile Navigation, if
equipped.
● Press the Settings side menu in the upper left corner
of the app to bring up app settings and access the
Assist Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website https://www.mopar.com/en-
us.html
(US Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian
Residents) provides you with all the information you
need, all in one place. You can track your service
history, find recommended accessories for your vehicle,
watch videos about your vehicle's features, and easily
access your manuals. It is also where you can
manage y
our Brand Connect account. This section will
familiarize you with the key elements of the website
that will help you get the most of your Brand Connect
connected services.
For customers in the United States, press the Sign
In/Register button and enter your email address and
password.
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle button.
Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health Report”, and
“Recalls”. The website will then prompt you to log in
using your email address and password.
●
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your Brand Connect
account, such as your contact information, password
and Brand Connect PIN, click on the Edit/Edit Profile
button to access the details of your account.
●
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your Brand Connect-
equipped vehicle.
●
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active Brand Connect
subscription, press one of these icons and enter
your four-digit Brand Connect Security PIN to
remotely start (if equipped), lock/unlock doors or
sound the horn and flash the lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your Brand
Connect account. For example, any time you use your
remote services (such as Remote Door Unlock), you
can elect to receive a text message, push notification,
MULTIMEDIA 189
5
and/or E-mail to notify you of the event. To set up the
notifications, please follow these instructions.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) and
select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca (Canadian
Residents), select “My Vehicle” and then
“Dashboard”.
2. Select “MY ACCOUNT”.
3. Once there, select “Brand Connect” where you can
edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
address to notify you, and you can customize the
types of messages.
USING BRAND CONNECT
SOS Call — If Equipped
WARNING!
Some Brand Connect connected services, including
SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call, will NOT work
without a network connection compatible with your
device.
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A Button
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Center Light Status Description
Red System error
Brand Connect In-Vehicle Assistance Features
With Brand Connect, your vehicle has onboard
assistance features located on the rearview mirror or
overhead console designed to enhance your driving
experience if you should ever need assistance or
support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact
with a Brand Connect Customer Care agent in the
event of an emergency. When the connection between
the vehicle and the live agent is made, your vehicle
will automatically transmit location information. In
the event of a minor collision, medical or any other
emergency, press the SOS button to be connected to a
call center agent who can send emergency assistance
to your vehicle’s location.
NOTE:
Certain Brand Connect connected services are
dependent on an operational Uconnect system, cellular
network availability that is compatible with the device
in your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all
features of Brand Connect are available everywhere at
all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light will
turn green indicating a call has been placed.
NOTE:
● In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before the
SOS call is placed. The system will verbally
alert you that a call is about to be made. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
Call button on the rearview mirror or overhead
console or press the Cancel button on the
touchscreen within 10 seconds.
● During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or outgoing
calls will go through your mobile device versus
the hands-free system which is not available
due to the SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
Brand Connect Customer Care agent is made, the
agent will stay on the line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
Brand Connect Customer Care center may be
recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use
of the Brand Connect connected services, you
consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and
that travel into Mexico and Canada may have limited
services. In particular, responses to SOS calls or
other emergency services may be unavailable or very
limited. Vehicles purchased outside the United States
and Canada are unable to receive Brand Connect
connected services.
190 MUL
TIMEDIA
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of
the following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected:
● The light will continuously be illuminated red.
● The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
● An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle
phone requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
● The ignition key is in OFF position.
● The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
● The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
● The SOS Call system software and/or hardware is
damaged during a vehicle crash.
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) coverage and/or GPS
signals are unavailable or obstructed.
● Network congestion.
● Weather conditions.
● Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason
(including during or after an accident), the SOS Call
system, among other vehicle systems, will not operate.
Requirements
● This f
eature is available only on vehicles sold in the
US or Canada.
● Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Brand
Connect connected services. Vehicle must be
registered with Brand Connect and have an active
subscription that includes the applicable feature.
● Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection compatible with your
device.
● Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning
electrical system.
WARNING!
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas.
You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call.
● Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment
to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent
your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s
electrical system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE VEHICLE BRANDED
APPS NOR THE BRAND CONNECT CONNECTED
SERVICES WILL OPERATE.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● The Occupant R
estraint Controller (ORC) turns
on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the air bag
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light
is illuminated, the air bag system may not be
working properly and the SOS Call system may not
be able to send a signal to the Brand Connect
Customer Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light
is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service
your vehicle immediately.
● Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services if needed.
If the Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated, have
an authorized dealer service the SOS Call system
immediately.
● If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from a Brand Connect Customer Care
agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
● Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and
regular inspection of your vehicle may result in
vehicle damage, accident or injury.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an accident, a live
agent will contact you through the Uconnect system and
alert emergency services.
MULTIMEDIA 191
5
NOTE:
An active Brand Connect subscription is required for
this feature to function.
After a crash where the airbags deploy:
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an agent.
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the
location of the emergency.
3. If needed, the agent will request the assistance of
emergency services.
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The agent will
remain on the call until emergency services arrive.
NOTE:
● Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the case
of an emergency.
● On your behalf, agents are able to notify family
members about the collision.
● Agents can brief first responders of the situation
before they arrive on scene.
● In the event vehicle occupants are unable to speak,
emergency services will be dispatched based on the
last known GPS coordinates.
● Brand Connect connected services are dependent
upon an operative telematics device, a cellular
connection, navigation map data, and GPS satellite
reception, which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency support.
● Terms of service of the Uconnect and the Brand
Connect subscriber agreement apply. See terms of
services for complete service limitation.
Remote Commands
On the R
emote Commands screen, you have access to
several vehicle features that can be controlled remotely
from your mobile device. These features include
locking/unlocking, remote starting, and activating the
horn and lights of the vehicle.
Lock Press this button to lock
your vehicle.
Vehicle Start Press this button to start
your vehicle.
Horn & Lights Press this button to
sound the horn and acti-
vate your lights.
Unlock Press this button to un-
lock your vehicle.
Cancel Vehicle Start Press this button to can-
cel remote start.
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your
vehicle in one of three ways:
● Anywhere using your mobile device and Vehicle
Branded App
● From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not
available on all functions)
● Contacting Brand Connect Customer Care (not
available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile Device
And The V
ehicle Branded App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on your
mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
Brand Connect Security PIN (this is the same four-
digit code established when you activated your
connected services). Enter the Security PIN on the
keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the command
to go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command was
received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the username
and password you used when activating your
connected services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links are
provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered into
your Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you want to
send the command to by clicking on its image
along the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote
commands. Press the desired icon to activate that
feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your Security PIN
(this is the same four-digit code established when
you activated your connected services). Please
enter your Security PIN.
192 MULTIMEDIA
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you
know if the command was received by your vehicle.
Contacting Customer Care (for example, in case of an
accidental lock-out):
1. Contact Customer Care if you are unable to lock
your vehicle through the Vehicle Branded App or
your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the Customer Care agent
will verify your identity by asking for your four-digit
Security PIN.
3. After providing your Security PIN, you can ask them
to perform a remote command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility
to protect your PIN appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides you the
ability to lock or unlock the door on your vehicle without
the keys and from virtually any distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
● The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
● The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
● Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
Requirements
● Vehicle must be properly equipped with Brand
Connect.
● Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network connection. If using the
Vehicle Branded App to command your vehicle, your
device must be compatible and be connected to
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
connection.
● Vehicle must be registered with Brand Connect
and have an active subscription that includes the
applicable feature.
● An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and
Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote
Horn & Lights activation.
● Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not be
processed if the vehicle is in motion, the ignition key
is on or during an emergency call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed via your
Owner’s Site or through the Vehicle Branded App on
your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with the
ability to start the engine on your vehicle without the
keys and from virtually any distance. Once started, the
preset climate controls in your vehicle can warm up or
cool down the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an engine
that has been started using Remote Vehicle Start.
After 15 minutes, if you have not entered your vehicle
with the key, the engine will shut off automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start system.
You can set up push notifications every time a
command is sent to activate or cancel Remote Start.
Working Vehicle Conditions
● The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
● The vehicle has been started with the key fob within
the last 14 days.
● The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
● The vehicle’s security system has been armed and
not triggered since the last vehicle start.
● The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
● The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
● The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of fuel,
along with oil and battery power.
● The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
● If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic
transmission.
● The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
● Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
● If the Panic button has been pressed, the vehicle
must be started at least once after alarming the
system.
MULTIMEDIA 193
5
NOTE:
The Brand Connect Customer Care agents are not
authorized for Remote Vehicle Start services. Contact
the Uconnect Care Team for assistance.
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy
parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may
also help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle
for any reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications every
time a command is sent to turn on the horn and lights.
Working Vehicle Conditions
● The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
● The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
● Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to
be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind
the surroundings when using this feature. You are
responsible for compliance with local laws, rules and
ordinances in the location of your vehicle when using
Remote Horn & Lights.
Assist — If Equipped
Description
Vehicles equipped with the Brand Connect connected
services feature may contain an ASSIST button in the
vehicle. Once your Brand Connect connected services
ha
ve been activated, the ASSIST button can connect
you directly to the Customer Care call center (if
equipped). You will be directed to one of the following
four services:
●
Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or need
a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who can help
anytime.
●
Connected Services — Contact the Brand Connect
Customer Care call center to activate your services,
renew after your trial has expired, for in-vehicle
support for your Brand Connect connected services,
or help answering any general questions surrounding
your connected services.
●
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all non-
connected Uconnect system features, such as radio
and Bluetooth® connections.
●
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
Requirements
● This f
eature is available only on vehicles sold in the
US and Canada.
● Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Brand
Connect connected services.
● Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection.
● Vehicle must be registered with Brand Connect
and have an active subscription that includes the
applicable feature.
● Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning
electrical system.
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your vehicle,
you agree to be responsible for any additional roadside
assistance service costs that you may incur. In order
to provide Brand Connect connected services to you,
we may record and monitor your conversations with
Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, or Brand Connect Customer Care, whether such
conversations are initiated through the Brand Connect
connected services in your vehicle, or via a landline
or mobile device, and may share information obtained
through such recording and monitoring in accordance
with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree
and consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing of
information obtained through any such call recordings.
194 MUL
TIMEDIA
Brand Connect In-Vehicle Assistance Features — If
Equipped
With Brand Connect, your vehicle has onboard
assistance features located on the rearview mirror or
overhead console designed to enhance your driving
experience if you should ever need assistance or
support.
How It Works
Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and you
will be presented with your ASSIST options on the
touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing the
touchscreen.
Send & Go — If Equipped
Description
The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a
destination on your mobile device, and then send the
route to your vehicle’s Navigation system.
How It Works
1. There are multiple ways to find a destination.
After selecting the Location tab at the bottom of
the App, browse through one of the categories
provided, or type the name or keyword in the
search box. You can also select categories such
as “Favorites” or “Contact List”.
2. Select your destination from the list that appears.
Location information will then be displayed on the
map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
● View the location on a map.
● See the distance from your current location.
● Send the destination to the vehicle (Send & Go).
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect Navigation in
your vehicle. You can also call the destination by
pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through a
notification or in the Navigation system.
Requirements
● Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection compatible with your
device.
● V
ehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the
location of your vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to
make finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the Vehicle
Branded App and select the Location tab at the bottom
of the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to find your
vehicle.
Requirements
● Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
● Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection compatible with your
device.
● Vehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
● Vehicle ignition must have been turned on within 14
days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that connects
your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
that is ready to go wherever you are. After you've made
your purchase, turn on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect
y
our devices.
● Enables all your passengers to be simultaneously
connected to the web.
● Connect several devices at one time.
● Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or any
other portable-enabled media — can connect over
your private in-vehicle network.
● A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone on
your private network access the Web — great for
working and relaxing.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot
while driving the v
ehicle as doing so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
MULTIMEDIA 195
5
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
the vehicle passengers with an internet
access hotspot in the vehicle, using the
radio as an access point. The hotspot
will allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a
laptop or any other portable-enabled media device) to
wirelessly connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a
complimentary 3-month trial period that includes 1GB
of total data. The trial can be activated any time within
the first year of new vehicle ownership.
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the 4G Wi-
Fi Hotspot App, and press the How To Purchase
button and follow the instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to the
AT&T portal to get set up.
3. For existing Connected Car customers: Push the
ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T Customer
Care agent who will assist you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can
change its name and the password by selecting the
Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot
button. You can also view the connected devices from
the app screen by pressing the View Connected Devices
button.
NOTE:
A Brand Connect subscription is not required in order
to purchase and use 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot. For more
information on setting up a Wi-Fi connection, visit
https://myvehicle.att.com.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel and obey all applicable laws. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to the
use of the features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use the features and applications in this vehicle
when it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result
in an accident involving in serious injury or death.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the Brand Connect Customer
Care agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and
work with law enforcement to help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will work
with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform Brand Connect Customer Care that
your vehicle has been stolen.
The Brand Connect Customer Care Agent will
ask for the stolen vehicle report number (as
issued by your local law enforcement). If you have
downloaded the Vehicle Branded App, you can
push the Settings menu button on your device,
select “Help”, and then select “Brand Connect
Customer Care” to make the call.
3. Brand Connect Customer Care will authenticate
that you are the owner of the vehicle and contact
the law enforcement with whom you filed the
stolen vehicle report.
4. Brand Connect Customer Care will work with your
local law enforcement to locate the vehicle. You
will be contacted by law enforcement if your
vehicle is recovered. While the investigation is
ongoing, you should also contact your insurance
company to inform it of the situation.
Requirements
● Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
● Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection compatible with your
device.
● Vehicle must be registered with Brand Connect
and have an active subscription that includes the
applicable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of Brand Connect are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report — If
Equipped
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect service
through which a summary of the performance of your
vehicle’s key systems will be sent to you every month
so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance
needs. This is provided as a convenience to you and
does not substitute for regular maintenance to your
vehicle.
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Report,
the Uconnect system in your vehicle may collect and
transmit vehicle data to Brand Connect and to FCA,
such as your vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the features in your
vehicle, and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins when you
enroll in Brand Connect and will continue even if you
cancel your Brand Connect subscription unless you
call Brand Connect Customer Care and tell them to
deactivate your connected services.
196 MUL
TIMEDIA
Use one of these three ways to purchase a subscription
to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for
more information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on Brand Connect private policy,
see https://siriusxmcvs.com/privacy-policy.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must be enrolled in an active subscription
with connected services. If you have concerns about
the operation, function or performance of your vehicle,
please take it to an authorized dealer. This report does
not replace regularly scheduled maintenance. Check
the instrument cluster warning lights and cautions
in your vehicle for the most accurate vehicle health
information.
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses
a problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems. For
further information, go to your Owner’s website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register and
activate services. During this process you will be asked
to provide an email address to which the reports will be
sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind you
when services are needed, or to alert you of other
important information, such as recall notices. When you
receive a notification through your touchscreen, press
OK to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to speak
with a Brand Connect Customer Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen
will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle
Messages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you can
reopen messages or delete messages.
Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to command
your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your vehicle and
remotely access key services and features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect Navigation,
you can send a destination directly to your vehicle using
Alexa.
If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa for
help, or complete a list of commands by saying: “Alexa,
ask <brand name> for help with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can ask
Alexa:
● “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
● “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
● “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000 Chrysler
Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my <vehicle name>.”
● “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel level of
my <vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to Brand Connect is required. To
use Amazon Ale
xa, first, register for Brand Connect
page 188
.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to
Amazon Alexa:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your mobile
device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials.
This will be the same user name and password
you used when registering for Brand Connect
connected services. There will be additional
settings to confirm on the following screen.
7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the <vehicle
brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill on
Alexa!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and give
you peace of mind when your loved ones are out on
the road. You can set boundary limits, monitor driving
speed, and pinpoint your vehicle’s location any time,
any place. Use the Vehicle Branded App to set alerts:
MULTIMEDIA 197
5
● Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle is
driven either out of or into a geographic boundary
that you set.
●
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being driven
outside of the curfew time.
●
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car exceeds a
speed limit you set.
●
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is
driven outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet drop-
off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Vehicle Branded App
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get
started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Vehicle Branded App from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using the
username and password you created when you
first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Vehicle Branded App should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, you
can enjo
y these features:
● Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the remote
lock button in the app and entering your security
PIN.
● Remote start or stop your vehicle.
● View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level,
vehicle location, tire pressure warning, and more.
MANAGE MY BRAND CONNECT ACCOUNT
To manage your Brand Connect account, press the
ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call Brand Connect
Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or turning
in your lease, to call Brand Connect Care to remove
your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about Brand Connect, active
subscribers can push the ASSIST button (if equipped)
and then select Brand Connect Call on your in-vehicle
touchscreen to contact Brand Connect. Your call will be
directed to a Brand Connect agent or held in a queue
until an agent is available. If you do not have an active
subscription, push the ASSIST button and press the
Activate button on the touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SER
VICES SOS FAQS — IF
EQUIPPED
1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS Call
button on the mirror or overhead console? You
have 10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call button
to cancel the call. To cancel the call, either push
the SOS Call button again, or press the Cancel
button on the in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use
the SOS Call button from my vehicle? Certain
vehicle information, such as make and model,
is transmitted along with the last known GPS
location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can
use the SOS Call button to make a call if you or
someone else needs emergency assistance.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR LOCK/
UNLOCK FAQS
1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the door?
Depending on various conditions, it can take up
to three minutes or more for the request to get to
your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
quickly, however its range is limited and your
Vehicle Branded App comes in handy for these and
other situations.
3.
Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? People
sometimes lose their mobile devices, which is why
security measures have been engineered into the
198 MULTIMEDIA
Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username,
password and Brand Connect Security PIN are
required for the activation of Remote services
through your mobile device. It is your responsibility
to protect your passwords and PINs.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle
Branded App? The Vehicle Branded App is
compatible with most devices with the Apple®
and Android™ operating systems. The capabilities
of these devices allow us to remotely command
your vehicle. Other operating systems may be
supported in the future.
5. Why is the Vehicle Branded App running slow? The
Vehicle Branded App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send commands
to your vehicle which must have an operable
LTE (voice/data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
connection. If either your device or your vehicle is
in an area with below average coverage, it may
take longer to log in and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
FAQS
1. What is the phone number for roadside assistance
call? The phone number is:
● US: 1-800-521-2779
● Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2.
If I am subscribed to Brand Connect, does
it cover towing or other expenses incurred by
using roadside assistance? No, however your new
vehicle may include Roadside Assistance Call
services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO FAQS —
IF EQUIPPED
1. How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle? Depending on various
conditions, it can take up to three minutes for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
you enter your vehicle, and start the engine, the
pop-up message stating that you have a new route
will appear. There is an exit button on the pop-up
that will cancel the route if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most recent
one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter the
vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message
offers a “Locations” option. Once “Locations” is
selected, you can choose from a list of recently
sent destinations.
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQS
1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your vehicle
may be located by anyone who has your PIN and
access to your account. It is your responsibility
to guard your PIN accordingly. See the Uconnect
and Brand Connect terms of service for more
information.
2.
How long does it take to sound my horn and flash
the lights? Depending on various conditions, it can
take three minutes or more for the request to get
through to your vehicle.
3.
How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
them on? If you are close enough to the vehicle,
you can use the key fob to turn off the horn and
lights by pushing the red Panic button.
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
ASSISTANCE FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To enhance
your privacy, and the privacy of others using your
vehicle, a stolen vehicle police report is required
for you to activate this service. You must involve
local law enforcement to have Brand Connect
locate your vehicle. We may also locate the vehicle
for other law enforcement or government agencies,
subject to a valid court order telling Brand Connect
to do so. We will also provide the service for
FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you have
purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? After
you provide the Brand Connect Customer Care
agent with the stolen vehicle report, the agent will
work together with law enforcement to try to locate
your vehicle. If your vehicle is recovered, you will
be contacted by law enforcement.
3. Can Brand Connect lower my insurance rates?
Some insurance providers offer lower rates on
vehicles equipped with systems that can deter
auto theft. When shopping for insurance, be sure
to inform the insurance provider of your Brand
Connect connected services subscription to find
out if the insurance provider can offer you a lower
rate.
MULTIMEDIA 199
5
NOTE:
FCA is not an insurance company, and Brand
Connect is not an insurance product. You are
responsible for obtaining insurance coverage for
your vehicle and yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
START FAQS
1. How long does it take to remotely start my vehicle?
Depending on various conditions, it can take three
minutes or more for the request to get through to
your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will remote start your vehicle
more quickly. However its range is limited. For
example, when you are leaving the stadium after
the game, you can use the Vehicle Branded App
to remote start your vehicle and have the inside of
your vehicle comfortable by the time you get to it.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
device? People sometimes lose their wireless
devices, which is why security measures have been
engineered into the Vehicle Branded App. Asking
for your username, password and Brand Connect
Security PIN help to ensure that nobody can start
your vehicle if they happen to find your device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using the
App? No. Driving your vehicle still requires the keys
to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start feature
simply starts the engine to warm up or cool down
the interior before you arrive.
5.
Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with the
cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? No. If the
vehicle is in motion, the cancel Remote Vehicle
Start button will not stop the vehicle.
6.
Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle
Branded App? The Vehicle Branded App has been
designed to work on most devices with the Apple®
and Android™ operating systems. The capabilities
of these devices allow us to remotely command
your vehicle. Other operating systems may be
supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN &
LIGHTS FAQS
1. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash
the lights? Depending on various conditions, it can
take three minutes or more for the request to get
through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the
lights quicker; however, its range is limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
them on? If you are close enough to the vehicle,
you can use the key fob to turn off the horn and
lights by pressing the red Panic button. Otherwise,
Remote Horn & Lights will continue for a maximum
of three minutes.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle
Branded App? The Vehicle Branded App has been
designed to work on most devices with the Apple®
and Android™ operating systems. The capabilities
of these devices allow us to remotely command
your vehicle. Other operating systems may be
supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQS — IF
EQUIPPED
1. How do I register for my Brand Connect account?
There are three ways that you can register your
Brand Connect Account:
● Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed to
an agent who can assist in registering your new
account.
● Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Select the button to speak with an agent,
who can assist in registering your new account.
● Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
menu. Enter your email on the touchscreen
and then follow the prompts from the provided
email. You will receive an email with an
activation link that will be good for 72 hours.
Once you click the activation link, you will
be prompted to fill out your information and
accept Terms and Conditions. Then, you will
be directed to the Brand Connect home page
to complete your profile and demo the remote
services.
2.
Why do I need an email address? Without an email
address, customers cannot register for Brand
Connect. Customers need to register so they can
subscribe to receive additional services and create
a Brand Connect Security PIN for remote command
requests.
3.
How do I create a Brand Connect security PIN?
Set up your Brand Connect Security PIN during the
registration process. The Brand Connect Security
PIN will be required to authenticate you when
200 MUL
TIMEDIA
accessing your account via Brand Connect Call or
performing any remote services, such as Remote
Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn & Lights, or
Remote Vehicle Start.
4. What if I forgot my Brand Connect security PIN? If
you’ve already activated services and forgot your
Brand Connect Security PIN, you can reset the PIN
by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site.
5. How do I update my Brand Connect payment
account address? Your Brand Connect Payment
Account address can be updated online, or by
calling Brand Connect Customer Care from ASSIST
in your vehicle. To update online: login to your
Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile > Brand
Connect Payment Account.
6. How do I update my Brand Connect profile?
Your name, home address, phone number, email
address and Brand Connect Security PIN can be
updated online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit your
personal information. Make your edits and click
Save.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy them?
Your new vehicle purchase may have come with an
included trial period for certain Apps and services.
8. Can I access every App and service while driving?
No, some applications and services are not
available while driving. For your own safety, it is not
possible to use some of the touchscreen features
while the vehicle is in motion (e.g. key pad).
9.
What happens when my subscription comes up
for renewal? If you have added a credit card to
your account information, your subscription will
be automatically renewed for a term length in
accordance with the service plan that you have
selected at the then current subscription rate
and on every renewal date thereafter, unless you
cancel your subscription by calling Brand Connect
Care. If you have not added a credit card to your
account, Brand Connect will send you an email or
letter in advance of your expiration date to remind
you that your subscription is ending soon.
10.
How do I manage my Brand Connect notification
preferences? Contact Brand Connect Customer
Care, or go to your Owner’s Site and then update
your preferences on the Brand Connect customer
web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact Brand
Connect Customer Care by pushing the ASSIST
button on your rearview mirror or overhead
console.
12. How do I update my credit card information? Login
to your Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile, then
select Brand Connect Payment Account.
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
my subscription? Contact Brand Connect Customer
Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and choose a
subscription to view its expiration date. When your
subscription is about to expire, you will receive an
email or letter of notification.
14.
Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided from
the date of cancellation for annual plans or longer.
Please see the Uconnect and Brand Connect
Terms & Conditions for refunds related to billing
plans of other lengths and other circumstances.
15.
Can I cancel a subscription before it expires?
Yes. If you have an annual subscription, your
subscription will be canceled the day you cancel. If
you have a monthly subscription, your subscription
will be canceled on the last day of the month in
which you choose to cancel.
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner, you’ll
want to remove your account information. This
process removes all personal information, returns
the Uconnect system to its original factory settings,
removes all Brand Connect connected services
and account information. To remove your account
information from the Uconnect system, contact
Brand Connect Customer Care.
17. What if I forgot to remove my account information
before I returned my lease vehicle or sold it?
Contact Brand Connect Customer Care.
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network connection
compatible with my device is temporarily
unavailable? The SOS Call and ASSIST buttons
will NOT function if you are not connected to an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data), 5G (data)
network. Services that required your smartphone
only direct calls to Roadside Assistance Call may
be functioning if you have an operable network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data
which may include information about your vehicle,
your vehicle’s health and performance, your vehicle’s
MULTIMEDIA 201
5
location, your utilization of the features in your
vehicle, and other data. The collection, use and
sharing of this information is required to provide
the Brand Connect connected services and is further
described by the Uconnect Privacy Policy, which can be
found at www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy.html (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents). This information may be
collected by SiriusXM® Connected Vehicle Services
Inc. and shared with FCA US LLC for the purposes
stated in the Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health
and diagnostic information including location data may
be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health Report
to you.
Even if you cancel your Brand Connect subscription,
this vehicle diagnostic health information, including
location data, may still be transmitted from your vehicle
and you may still have a Vehicle Health Report sent to
you.
Use of any of the connected services including Brand
Connect is deemed to be your consent to the collection,
use and disclosure of this information in accordance
with the Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want
this information to be collected, used, or shared, you
must cancel your Uconnect services in their entirety by
contacting us as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy
Policy.
PERFORMANCE PAGES
Performance Pages is an application that provides a
display for performance indicators that will help you
gain familiarity with the capabilities of your vehicle in
real time.
To access the Performance Pages, press the
Vehicle button on the touchscreen. Then, press the
Performance Pages button on the touchscreen. Press
the desired button on the touchscreen to access that
specific Performance Page.
On vehicles equipped with SRT, to access the
Performance Pages, press the Vehicle button on the
touchscreen. Then, press the SRT tab at the top of the
touchscreen. Selecting the SRT button will bring you to
three different page options: Performance Pages, Drive
Modes, and Race Options. Press the Performance
Pages button and then press the desired button on the
touchscreen to access that specific Performance Page.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features
be used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The Performance Pages include the following:
● Timers
● Gauges
● Dyno/Engine
● G-Force
● V
ehicle Dynamics
The following describes each feature and its operation:
TIMERS
Timers
When the Timers page is selected, you will be able
to select the Drag or Accel & Braking tab by either
pressing the Up or Down arrow towards the right side of
the touchscreen, or dragging your finger in an upwards
or downwards motion.
Accel & Braking
Timers — Accel & Braking
● Recent
A real-time summary of performance timers.
● Last
The last recorded run of performance timers.
● Best
The best recorded run of performance timers.
202 MUL
TIMEDIA
Drag
Timers — Drag
● Recent
A real-time summary of performance timers.
● Last
The last recorded run of performance timers.
● Best
The best recorded run of per
formance timers, except
for braking data.
Save
Pressing the Save button will let you save the visible
page, Recent/Last/Best.
NOTE:
Pressing the Snapshot icon in the lower right corner of
the screen at any time will save a screenshot of the
screen currently being viewed to the connected USB
device.
Information about your vehicle appears at the time
a snapshot is taken such as the vehicle’s Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), miles on the odometer,
longitude and latitude coordinates, and more.
● With a USB drive installed, press the USB button to
save to the jump drive.
● Press the Cancel button to return to the Timers page.
NOTE:
Snapshot recordings can only be saved onto FAT32
formatted USB devices.
The tabs on the Timers page contain the following
timers listed:
●
Reaction Time: Measures the driver's reaction time
for launching the vehicle against a simulated drag
strip timing light (behavior modeled after 500
Sportsman Tree) displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
Drag timers (RT, 60 ft [20 m], 330 ft [100 m], ⅛
mile [200 m], 1000 ft [300 m], and ¼ mile [400 m])
and Acceleration timers (0-60 mph [0-96 km/h] and
0-100 mph [0-160 km/h]) will be ready to acquire
new Recent data measurements when the vehicle is
at 0 mph (0 km/h).
The following timer listed shows estimated timing at
which the time required to travel at the cited distance
is met. Some timers will also display speeds present at
the time the distance was met.
● 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
● 0-100 mph (0-160 km/h)
● 60 f
t (20 m) ET
● 330 ft (100 m) ET
● ⅛ Mile + speed (200 m + speed) ET
● ⅛ Mile + speed (200 m + speed) mph
● 1000 ft (300 m) ET
● ¼ Mile + speed (400 m + speed) ET
● ¼ Mile + speed (400 m + speed) mph
● Brake Distance ft (meters)
NOTE:
The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released, or the parking brake is
engaged, before the vehicle comes to a complete
stop.
● Brake from mph (km/h)
NOTE:
Brake Distance and Speed timers only displays
“ready” when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30
mph (48 km/h).
● Brake from km/h
NOTE:
Brake Distance and Speed timers only displays
“ready” when vehicle is traveling at greater than 48
km/h (30mph).
MULTIMEDIA 203
5
GAUGES
Gauges
When selected, this screen displays the following
values:
● Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
● Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
● Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
● Battery Voltage
Shows actual battery voltage.
● Trans Oil Temp — If Equipped with an Automatic
Transmission
Shows actual transmission oil temperature.
● Boost Pressure — If Equipped
Shows actual boost pressure.
● Air F
uel Ratio — If Equipped
Shows current air fuel ratio.
● I/C Coolant Temp — If Equipped
Shows actual I/C Coolant temperature.
● Intake Air Temp
Shows actual air intake temperature.
If a gauge is selected, the Gauge Detail View page will
appear on the screen. This page shows gauge values
for the previous two minutes on the selected gauge.
Gauge Detail View Page
Pressing the Up and Down arrows will cycle through the
details for each of the gauges. Pressing the minimize
button beside the graph will return to the gauge menu.
DYNAMOMETER (DYNO)/ENGINE
Dynamometer (Dyno)
The system will start drawing graphs for Power and
Torque (top chart) and Engine Speed (bottom chart).
The graph will fill from the left side of the x-axis and
fill to the right side of the x-axis (based on History time
selected). Once the right side of the page is reached,
the graph will scroll with the right side always being the
most recent recorded sample.
Dyno
The following options can be selected:
● Pressing the STOP button will freeze the graph.
Selecting “Play” will clear the graph and restart the
process over.
● Press the + or - buttons to change the history of
the graph. The selectable options are “30”, “60”,
“90”, and “120” seconds. The graph will expand or
constrict depending on the setting selected.
● Select the Gear display setting to turn the graph gear
markers on and off.
NOTE:
The Gear on/off feature will only display if your vehicle
is equipped with an Automatic Transmission.
204 MUL
TIMEDIA
Engine
Press the Up and Down arrow buttons on the right
side of the touchscreen to cycle between the Dyno and
Engine pages.
Engine — 6.4L
Engine — 6.2L
When selected, this screen displays the following
values:
●
Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
●
Engine P
ower
Shows the instantaneous power.
●
Engine Torque
Shows the instantaneous torque.
●
Oil Pressure (6.4L Only) — If Equipped
Shows the actual engine oil pressure.
●
Boost Pressure (6.2 Only) — If Equipped
Shows the actual boost pressure.
●
Gear
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle.
G-FORCE
G-Force
When “G-Force” is selected, the following features will
be available:
● V
ehicle Speed
Measures the current speed of the vehicle in either
mph or km/h, starting at zero with no maximum
value.
● Front G-Force
Measures the peak braking force on the front of the
vehicle.
● Right G-Force
Measures the peak force on the right side of the
vehicle.
● Left G-Force
Measures the peak force on the left side of the
vehicle.
● Rear G-Force
Measures the peak acceleration force on the rear of
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Front, Right, Left, and Rear G-Forces are all peak
values. These readings can be reset by clearing peak
G-Force on the instrument cluster.
The friction circle display shows instantaneous G-Force
as a highlight and previous G-Force as dots within the
circle. The system records previous G-Force for three
minutes. If there are multiple samples at a given point,
the color of the dot will darken from blue to red. Vectors
more frequent will show in red; infrequent vectors will
show in blue.
MULTIMEDIA 205
5
Pitch & Roll
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
visualization of the current vehicle angle.
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
Vehicle Dynamics
SRT DRIVE MODES — IF EQUIPPED
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a Drive Modes
feature which allows for coordinating the operation
of various vehicle systems depending upon the type
of driving beha
vior desired. The Drive Modes feature
is controlled through the touchscreen and may be
accessed by performing any of the following:
● Selecting “Vehicle”, then “Dashboard” and then
“Drive Modes” from the Vehicle menu.
● Pushing the SRT button located on the instrument
panel switchbank.
The SRT Drive Modes main screen displays the current
drive mode and real-time status of the vehicle’s
performance configuration. The selectable Drive Modes
are Track, Sport, Auto, Snow, Tow, and Custom.
Information shown will indicate the actual status of
each system, along with a vehicle graphic that displays
the active drive mode status. The color red indicates
“Track”, orange “Sport”, yellow “Street”, blue “Snow”,
and purple “Tow”. These features will reset to AUTO
upon an ignition cycle. If the system status shown does
not match the current drive mode setup, a message will
be displayed indicating which values are not matching
the current mode.
SPORT MODE
Drive Modes (Sport)
Selecting “Sport” on the touchscreen will activate
the configuration for typical enthusiast driving.
The Transmission, Stability Control, All-Wheel Drive,
Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their
Sport settings. The Paddle Shifters are enabled.
Sport Mode Set-Up
206 MULTIMEDIA
Road Wheel Angle
Road Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to
zero (straight ahead) reference angle. The zero degree
reference angle measurement indicates a steering
wheel straight ahead position.
SRT DRIVE MODES — IF EQUIPPED
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a Drive Modes
feature which allows for coordinating the operation
TRACK MODE
Drive Modes (Track)
Selecting “Track” on the touchscreen will activate the
configuration for typical track driving. The Transmission,
Stability Control, All-Wheel Drive, Steering, and
Suspension systems are all set to their Track settings.
The Paddle Shifters are enabled.
NOTE:
While in Track Mode, Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Full-Off can be activated by pushing and holding the
ESC Off button on the instrument panel switch bank for
five seconds.
Track Mode Set-Up
TOW MODE
Drive Modes (Tow)
Selecting “Tow” on the touchscreen will activate the
configuration for towing a trailer or hauling heavy loads
in the cargo area. Once in this mode, trailer sway
control is enabled in the ESC system. The Transmission
and Suspension are set to Tow, Stability Control is set to
Full, All-Wheel Drive is set to 50/50, and Steering is set
to Street. Paddle Shifters are enabled.
Tow Mode Set-Up
SNOW MODE
Drive Mode (Snow)
Selecting “Snow” on the touchscreen will activate Snow
Mode for use on loose traction surfaces. When in Snow
Mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the
transmission will use second gear (rather than first
gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage. The
Transmission is set to Snow, Stability Control is set to
MULTIMEDIA 207
5
Full, All-Wheel Drive is set to 50/50, and Steering and
Suspension are set to Street.
Paddle Shifters can be enabled or disabled by pressing
the Snow Set-Up button on the touchscreen.
Snow Mode Set-Up
AUTO MODE
Drive Mode Auto (Default)
Auto Mode is enabled upon ignition ON, or by selecting
“Auto” on the touchscreen. The Transmission, Stability
Control, and All-Wheel Drive modes are set to their
Street settings. Steering and Suspension can be
configured in Track, Sport, or Street. The Paddle
Shifters may be enabled or disabled while in Auto Mode
Set-Up.
Auto Mode Set-Up
CUSTOM MODE
Drive Mode (Custom)
Custom Mode may be selected by pushing the Custom
button on the touchscreen. Custom Mode allows you
to create a custom configuration that is saved for
quick selection of your favorite settings. While in
Custom Mode, the All-Wheel Drive, Stability Control,
Transmission, Steering, and Suspension settings are
shown in their current configuration.
Custom Mode Set-Up Info
Within the Custom Mode Set-Up screen, press the info
button on the touchscreen then use the Left/Right
arrow to scroll through all the available Drive Mode
systems giving you a description of their operation and
current configuration.
Custom Mode Set-Up Info Button
208 MULTIMEDIA
Transmission
8-Speed Transmission
● Track
Press the Track button on the touchscreen to provide
the fastest shift speeds with the highest comfort
trade-off.
● Sport
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to provide
faster shift speeds with some comfort trade-off.
● Street
Press the Street button on the touchscreen to
provide a balance of shift speed and comfort for
typical daily driving.
Paddle Shifters
Paddle Shifters
● ON
Press the On button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
● OFF
Press the Off button on the touchscreen to disable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
All-Wheel Drive
All-Wheel Drive
● Track
Press the Track button on the touchscreen to provide
the greatest distribution of torque to the rear wheels
(70%).
● Sport
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to provide
greater distribution of torque to the rear wheels
(65%).
● Street
Press the Street button on the touchscreen to
provide moderate distribution of torque to the rear
wheels (60%).
● 50/50
Press the 50/50 button on the touchscreen to
provide even distribution of torque between the front
and rear wheels.
MULTIMEDIA 209
5
Stability Control
Stability Control
● Track
Press the Track button on the touchscreen to provide
minimal stability control.
NOTE:
The engine torque management portion of traction
control is automatically turned off when TRACK
Mode stability is selected.
● Sport
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to provide
reduced stability control.
● Street
Press the Street button on the touchscreen to
provide full (default) stability control.
Suspension
Suspension
● Track
Press the Track button on the touchscreen to provide
the firmest suspension stiffness with the highest
amount of comfort trade-off.
● Sport
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to provide
a firmer suspension stiffness with moderate comfort
trade-off.
● Street
Press the Street button on the touchscreen to
provide a balance of suspension stiffness and ride
comfort for typical daily driving.
Steering
Steering
● Track
Press the Track button on the touchscreen to adjust
the steering effort and feel to the greatest level.
● Sport
Press the Sport button on the touchscreen to adjust
the steering effort and feel to a greater level.
● Street
Press the Street button on the touchscreen to
balance the steering feel and comfort.
RACE OPTIONS
To access the Race Options features, press the Vehicle
button on the touchscreen, then the SRT button, and
lastly the Race Options button to display the vehicle’s
Launch Control screen. Within Race Options, you can
210 MULTIMEDIA
activate, deactivate, and adjust the RPM values for the
Launch Control and Shift Light features
page 212.
LAUNCH CONTROL
WARNING!
Launch Control is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve
consistent vehicle acceleration in a straight line.
Launch Control manages engine RPM while launching
the vehicle. This feature is intended for use during
race events on a closed course where consistent 1/4-
mile and 0-to-60 times are desired. The system is not
intended to compensate for lack of driver experience
or familiarity with the race track. Use of this feature
in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may
results in excess wheel slip outside this systems control
resulting in an aborted launch.
Preconditions:
● Launch Control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
area.
● Launch Control is not available within the first 500
miles (805 km) of engine break-in.
● Launch Control should only be used when the engine
and transmission are at operating temperature.
● Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
road surfaces only.
Launch Control is only available when the following
procedure is followed:
Activate Launch Control
1. Press the Race Options tab on the touchscreen
to set RPM, or push the LAUNCH button on the
console to activate Launch Control.
2. Adjust your launch RPMs for optimum launch/
traction, if required.
3. Press the Activate Launch Control button on the
touchscreen, follow instructions in the instrument
cluster display.
● Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
● Put vehicle in first gear or Drive.
● Steering wheel must be centered with tires
pointing forward.
● Vehicle must be on level ground.
● Apply brake pressure.
● While holding the brake, rapidly apply and hold
the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The
engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set
in the Launch Control screen.
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument cluster
display to inform the driver if one or more of the
above conditions have not been met.
4. When the above conditions have been met, the
instrument cluster display will read “Release
Brake”.
5. Keep the vehicle pointed straight and release the
brake.
Launch Control will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system will return to its current
ESC mode.
Launch Control will abort before launch completion and
will display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any
the following conditions:
● The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
● The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
● The ESC Off button is pressed to change the system
to another mode.
MULTIMEDIA 211
5
NOTE:
The Launch Control RPM setting can only be adjusted
while Launch Control is not active. After Launch Control
has been aborted, ESC will return to its current ESC
mode.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
Launch RPM Set-Up
To adjust the Launch RPM, drag the slider bar or press
the arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding
RPM. The launch RPM limit is between the minimum
and maximum RPM values shown on the gauge, in 100
RPM increments.
SHIFT
LIGHT
Your vehicle is equipped with a Shift Light feature that
illuminates the back light of the tachometer in red
within the instrument cluster display. This feature is a
visual cue to manually up-shift using the paddle shifters
or shif
ting the transmission gear selector.
Shift Light Button
To actuate the Shift Light feature, press the Shift
Light button on the touchscreen while in the Race
Options tab, then press the Shift Light On button on
the touchscreen. Activation is shown on the instrument
cluster display.
Once the Shift Light is on, it is only active while the gear
shifter is in the Manual or Sport shifter position (M or S
position).
NOTE:
Paddle Shifters can be used to shift, however using the
Paddle Shifters while the shifter is in Drive (D) position
will not enable the Shift Light feature.
Shift Light RPM Set-Up
The Shift Light RPM Set-Up allows you to set the Shift
Light to illuminate for gears 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5-6. Pressing
and releasing the Up/Down arrow buttons above and
below each listed gear, the RPM values will change
in increments of 250 RPM. Pressing and holding the
arrows will change the RPM values in increments of
500 RPM, ranging from 6250 RPM. The Shift Light
Setup screen may only be accessed if the feature is
enabled, press the Reset to Factory Default button on
the touchscreen to change back to factory settings,
or press the Deactivate Shift Light button on the
touchscreen to turn the system off completely.
GUIDELINES FOR TRACK USE
● If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes
they will alter the vehicle’s performance in various
driving situations. It is recommended that your
vehicle operates in SPORT or TRACK Modes during
the track event.
212 MUL
TIMEDIA
● Prior to each track event, verify all fluids are at the
correct levels.
● Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear
brake pads have more than half pad thickness
remaining. If the brake pads require changing,
complete a brake burnish procedure prior to track
outing at full pace.
NOTE:
Use of DOT 4 brake fluid is suggested for extended
track use due to increased thermal capacity.
● At the conclusion of each track event, it is
recommended that a brake bleed procedure is
performed to maintain the pedal feel and stopping
capability of your Brembo High Performance brake
system.
● It is recommended that each track outing should
end with a minimum of one cooldown lap using
minimal braking.
● All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours
of endurance, however, it is recommended that
suspension system, brake system, prop shaft, and
half shaft boots should be checked for wear or
damage after every track event.
● Track usage results in increased operating
temperatures of the engine, transmission, driveline,
and brake system. This may affect Noise Vibration
Harshness (NVH) countermeasures of your vehicle.
New components may need to be installed to return
the system to the original NVH performance.
● Tire pressure:
○ R
ecommended tire pressure of 33 psi (230 kPa)
when tires are cold, or below 42 psi (290 kPa)
when hot.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you target below 42 psi
(290 kPa) when tires are hot at the conclusion of
each track session. Starting at 33 psi (230 kPa)
cold and adjusting based on ambient and track
conditions is recommended. Tire pressure can be
monitored via the instrument cluster display and
can assist with adjustments.
Track burnishing your brakes
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the
brake pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish
for factory-installed components or when new brake
friction components are installed:
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by
driving at 75% speed. Brake at approximately
0.60-0.80g max without Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) intervention.
2. Complete one lap in this manner until you start
smelling the brakes. Continue for another half lap
at speed, then complete a two-lap cooldown with
minimal brake applications. Ensure the brakes
are not smoking. If they are, complete another
cooldown lap.
3. Getting the brakes to smoke is an indication that
the brakes have overheated and may negatively
affect future track usage.
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for
at least 30 minutes. If an infrared thermal gun is
available, allow rotors to cool to 200°F (93.3°C)
before returning to the track.
5. There should be a thin layer of ash when
inspecting the brake pads. Having the ash layer go
more than half the thickness of the pad material is
a sign of an overly aggressive burnish.
6. Occasionally, a second burnish session is required.
If the brake pads begin to emit an odor during
the next track session, reduce vehicle speed and
braking deceleration rate to burnish targets and
follow steps 2-4.
7. New pads installed on old rotors still need to
be burnished. New rotors installed with old pads
should be burnished at the track or street driven
for 300 city miles to develop an adequate lining
transfer layer on the rotor surface prior to track
use.
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be
replaced.
NOTE:
Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended,
as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its
thermal capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor
cheek, making it less robust and increasing the
likelihood of pulsation in further track use.
ECO MODE
Press the ECO button on the touchscreen to activate
ECO Mode. ECO Mode modifies the vehicle’s engine
and transmission settings to provide improved fuel
economy with a trade-off in acceleration performance.
Increased engine exhaust noise and/or vibration may
MULTIMEDIA 213
5
be noticed while ECO is active. This is normal and a
result of the increased amount of operating conditions
where the vehicle is allowed to operate in four-cylinder
mode (6.4L only).
The Paddle Shifters will be disabled while in ECO Mode.
● ECO is only available in AUTO Mode.
● Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate ECO.
● ECO will be disabled when another Drive Mode is
selected or the ECO button is pushed.
● When ECO is activated in AUTO mode, it will remain
in ECO upon activation of AUTO Mode from any other
mode including across key cycles. To deactivate,
press the ECO button again.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
is f
ar below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted
in some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on
the wireless radio
page 342.
214 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on
in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from your radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within
the vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the
radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily
improve from repositioning the mobile phone, it is
recommended that the volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using the
Uconnect system.
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
● ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop).
● Brake pedal pulsations.
● A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop.
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
● The ABS contains sophisticat
ed electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
● Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
● The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the available traction.
● The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
● The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA)
RSRA alerts you through a visual and auditory
notification of the possible presence of an object,
passenger, or pet in the rear seats if a rear door was
opened up to 10 minutes before the ignition was placed
in the ON/RUN position. RSRA does not directly detect
objects, passengers, or pets in the rear seats. When
the previous conditions are met, RSRA displays the
message “Check Rear Seat” on the instrument cluster
display and sounds an auditory alert upon the driver
placing the ignition in the OFF position to exit the
vehicle.
SAFETY 215
6
To enable or disable RSRA, see
page 140.
WARNING!
● Bef
ore exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
● Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System
(TCS). These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), Rain Brake Support (RBS),
Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway Control
(TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power Steering
(EPS) modules that, when equipped, provides torque
at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions in
which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability.
The torque that the steering wheel receives is only
meant to help the driver realize optimal steering
behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability.
The only notification the driver receives that the feature
is active is the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize
the correct course of action through small torques on
the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque.
It is very important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible
for steering the vehicle.
216 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM) determines that the rate of change of the
steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient
to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power
to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM
can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially
those that involve leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract these conditions. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
● Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
● Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the
Traction Control System (TCS) is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
● Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on
(Continued)
WARNING!
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
● Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively
affect the performance of the ESC system.
Changes to the steering system, suspension,
braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade
ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or
poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
syst
em ma
y ha
v
e multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode f
or the ESC.
Whene
v
er the v
ehicle is star
t
ed, the ESC system will
SAFETY 217
6
be in this mode. This mode should be used for most
driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only
be used for specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify Traction Control System (TCS)
and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for
more wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push
and release of the button may toggle the ESC modes.
Multiple attempts may be required to return to "ESC On"
mode.
WARNING!
● When in “P
artial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be
illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled,
and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
● Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To
enter the “ESC Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC
OFF button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped
with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and
the “ESC OFF” message will display in the instrument
cluster. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
The system may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when the vehicle exceeds a predetermined
speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the
predetermined speed the system will return to ESC “Full
Off”.
“Full Off” can only be achieved in Track Mode (if
equipped).
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if
equipped).
WARNING!
● In the ESC “F
ull Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are significantly
reduced or disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is unavailable.
In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC
system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for off-
highway or off-road use only.
● The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
(Continued)
WARNING!
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prevent all accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If
this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
218 SAFETY
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
● The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition placed in the ON position.
● Each time the ignition is placed in the ON position,
the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete
stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
● The feature must be enabled.
● The vehicle must be stopped.
● The parking brake must be off.
● The driver door must be closed.
● The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
● The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
● HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the
transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, if the clutch is
pressed, HSA will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting see
page 140.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
● If y
ou use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down
an incline while resuming acceleration, manually
activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
● HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
● Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the
front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield
wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support
is active, there is no notification to the driver and no
driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation may occur
by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
SAFETY 219
6
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the
TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in reduced
modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. Note that TSC
cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations
page 126.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to prevent trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear
fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is
in any forward gear and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
in width, on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m).
The zone length starts at the side of the vehicle, near
the B-pillar, and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m)
beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides
of the v
ehicle when the vehicle speed has reached
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
● The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
● BSM may experience dropouts (blinking on and off)
of the side mirror warning indicator lights when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of
the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than
a couple of seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud,
or other road contaminants accumulate on the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located.
The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle
is operated in areas with extremely low radar returns
such as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop.
If blockage is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable, Wipe Rear Corners” message will display
in the cluster, both mirror lights will illuminate, and
BSM and RCP alerts will not occur. This is normal
operation. The system will automatically recover and
resume function when the condition clears. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks,
etc.) and keep it clear of road contaminants.
220 SAFET
Y
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors, in addition to sounding
an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
page 223.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system
will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h)) the warning light will be
SAFETY 221
6
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
If the system detects degraded performance due to
contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn
you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in
side view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will
remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions
are met. First clear any debris from the rear fascia
which may cause a blockage. After removing the
blockage, the following procedure can be used to reset
the system:
Cycle the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON.
If the blockage message is still present after cycling
the ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a
blockage.
The system may also detect a blockage if the vehicle is
operated in areas with extremely low radar returns such
as a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop.
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two
vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls,
foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system
may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and
your vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
page 342.
Opposing Traffic
For information on how Blind Spot Monitoring functions
when pulling a trailer
page 223.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
t
o help de
t
ect objects in the blind spo
t zones. The
BSM syst
em is no
t designed t
o de
t
ect pedestrians,
bicy
clists, or animals. Even if y
our vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
e
xposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
5 mph (8 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking
lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
222 SAFET
Y
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path (RCP) detection is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot
situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up,
even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of operation
that are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected
object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it
corresponds to an alert present on that side of
the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded.
Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present
on the same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible
alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Trailer Merge Assist — If Equipped
Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the blind spot
zone to work while pulling a trailer.
NOTE:
When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear Cross Path
is disabled.
Trailer Merge Assist consists of three sub functions:
● Automatic Trailer Detection
● Trailer Length Detection
● Trailer Merge Warning
Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
1 — Vehicle
2 — Trailer
Automatic Trailer Detection
There are two modes of operation for the detection of
the trailer length:
●
Automatic Mode
— When “Auto Mode” is selected,
the system will use the blind spot sensors to
automatically determine the presence and length of
a trailer. The presence of a trailer will be detected
using the blind spot radar within 90 seconds of
forward movement of the vehicle. The vehicle must
be moving above 6 mph (10 km/h) to activate the
feature. Once the trailer has been detected, the
system will default to the maximum blind spot zone
until the length has been verified. You will see “Auto”
in the instrument panel cluster
.
SAFETY 223
6
●
Maximum Mode
— When “Max Mode” is selected,
the system will default to the maximum blind spot
zone regardless of what size trailer is attached
.
NOTE:
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. To change this setting, it must be
selected through the Uconnect Settings
page 140.
Trailer Length Detection
Once the trailer presence has been established, the
trailer length will be established (by making a 90
degree turn) and then the trailer length category
(example 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be displayed. This
can take up to 30 seconds after completing the turn.
NOTE:
During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a
standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new “trailer
detection request” is enabled by the system once the
vehicle resumes motion.
The maximum trailer length supported by the Trailer
Merge Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m). Trailer length
is considered the forward most portion of the trailer
hitch to the rearward most portion of the body, fascia/
bumper, or ramp of the trailer.
The maximum width supported by the Trailer Merge
Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer width is
measured at the widest portion of the trailer and may
include wheels, tires, fenders, or rails.
NOTE:
The ability to detect a trailer may be degraded in
crowded or busy environments. Busy parking lots,
narrow areas surrounded with trees, or any other
crowded area may prevent the radar sensors from
being able to adequately detect the trailer. The system
will try to detect a trailer at every ignition cycle or 90
seconds of standstill.
Trailer Length Detection
1 — Trailer Length
2 — Trailer Hitch
3 — Trailer Width
Trailer length will be identified and placed into one of
the following categories:
● Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind spot zone will
be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m)
.
● Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft (3 m to 6 m) —
Blind spot zone will be adjusted to 20 ft (6 m)
.
● Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to 9 m) —
Blind spot zone will be adjusted to 30 ft (9 m)
.
● Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft (9 m to
12 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to Max
distance .
NOTE:
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of
actual length. Trailers that are the same size as the
category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be subject
to being placed in the category above or below the
correct one.
Trailer Merge Warning
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind spot
function to cover the length of the trailer, plus a safety
margin, to warn the driver when there is a vehicle in the
adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by the illumination
of the BSM Warning Light located in the outside mirror
on the side the other vehicle is detected on. In addition,
an audible (chime) alert will be heard and radio volume
will be reduced
page 140.
NOTE:
● The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert the
driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
● The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side
mirror warning indicator lights when a motorcycle or
any small object remains at the side of the vehicle
for extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
● Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighborhoods,
etc. may lead to an increased amount of false alerts.
This is normal operation.
224 SAFETY
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The
BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the
driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings and limited braking are intended to provide
the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate
the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC) to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision
by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force,
the system will compensate and provide additional
brake force as required.
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 38 mph (62 km/h), the system may provide the
maximum or partial braking to mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two
seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
● The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2
km/h).
● The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other
than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based
on the course prediction. This is expected and is a
part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
● It is unsaf
e to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking
portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next
ignition cycle.
● The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings. If the vehicle enters 4WD Low, the
FCW system will be automatically deactivated
page 342
.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and A
ctiv
e Braking status are
pr
ogrammable thr
ough the Uconnect syst
em
page
1
40
.
The def
ault sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” se
tting
and the syst
em status is “
W
arning & Braking”. This
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings and it applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings when
the latter is at a farther distance than the “Medium”
SAFETY 225
6
setting. This provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting allows
the system to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front when the distance between the
vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides
less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium”
settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
● Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking,
or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential
frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual
warnings.
● Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
● The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
● FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with
the same or higher rat
e of speed.
● FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the
active braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is no
longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
● ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
● Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with run flat tires, when the
TPMS indicates a tire pressure of 14 psi (96 kPa) or
lower, always check tire pressure and replace the tire
at the f
irst opportunity. At inflation pressure of or below
14 psi (96 kPa) the tire is in the Run Flat mode of
operation. In this condition, it is recommended that a
vehicle keep a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h)
for a maximum distance of 50 miles (80 km). The
manufacturer does not recommend using the run flat
feature while driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or
towing a trailer.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always
be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven —
this is normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
See
page 312 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or
above recommended cold tire pressure. Once the low
tire pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire
226 SAFETY
pressure must be increased to the recommended cold
tire pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to be
turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24
km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193
kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn
on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on.
In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
● The TPMS has been optimized f
or the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
(Continued)
CAUTION!
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor
is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels
and may contribute to a poor overall system
performance or sensor damage. Customers
are encouraged to use Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper
TPMS feature operation.
● Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
TPMS sensor to become inoperable. After using
an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that
you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership
to have your sensor function checked.
● After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
● The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
● The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
● Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
● The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the
le
vel to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
● Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure
levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of
the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to regularly check the
tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the
proper pressure
page 342.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
● Receiver module
● Four TPMS sensors
SAFETY 227
6
● Various TPMS messages, which display in the
instrument cluster, and a graphic displaying tire
pressures
● TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster, and an audible
chime will be activated, when one or more
of the four active road tire pressures are
low. In addition, the instrument cluster will display an
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic display of the
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) in a different color
page 74.
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
BAR or kPa.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a different color on
the graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold
tire pressure displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic
display of the pressure value(s) will return to its original
color and the TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
The TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime.
The instrument cluster display will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds.
This message is then followed by a graphic display, with
“--“ in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor(s) is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system
fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no
longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will
not be present, and a pressure value will be displayed
instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by any of
the following:
● Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
● Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
● Using tire chains on the vehicle.
● Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
There is no TPMS sensor in the spare tire. The TPMS
will not be able to monitor the tire pressure. If you
install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has
a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon
the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS Warning Light
will remain on, a chime will sound, and the instrument
cluster display will still display a pressure value in the
different color graphic display and an “Inflate to XX”
message will be displayed. After driving the vehicle for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
display will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message
for five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure value. For each subsequent ignition switch
cycle, a chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the instrument cluster display will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster display will display a
228 SAFET
Y
new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24
km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as
when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on
your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will
no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will
no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
FEATURES
● Seat Belt Systems
● Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
● Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a
rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position
page
2
45
.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far back as
possible and use the proper child restraint
page 245
.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front
air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the
space between occupants and the door and
occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see
page 338 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
(Continued)
SAFETY 229
6
WARNING!
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce
the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused
by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor
vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts.
The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will
signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard
front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat
belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal
or other items are placed on the outboard front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained
in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
230 SAFETY
WARNING!
● R
elying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
● In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
● It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at their
seating position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
● Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● T
wo people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
● A lap belt w
orn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
● A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists.
If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
● A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into
the buckle nearest you.
● A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
● A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
(Continued)
WARNING!
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the
arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as
strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
● A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
● A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
SAFETY 231
6
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat
(for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the
latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to
allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. T
o loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract
to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plat
e, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins
immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot
at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears
the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
232 SAFETY
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
● W
earing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
● Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
● Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
● Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
● Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when
the lap belt is not long enough and only use in
the recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
SAFETY 233
6
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced
immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
an Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision.
The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
system
page 253.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
60/40 Second Row (5 Passenger)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull
the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear
a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the
webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click”.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract
to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
234 SAFET
Y
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
● The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
(Continued)
WARNING!
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
● Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
● Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or
children who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument Panel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Supplemental Knee Air Bags
● Front and Side Impact Sensors
● Seat Belt Pretensioners
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first
in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air
Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
SAFETY 235
6
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a
malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag
system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to
be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs,
have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
● The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
● The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
● The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your
protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean y
ou won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared.
In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately
page 81.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front
air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger front
air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above
the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
● Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
(Continued)
236 SAFETY
WARNING!
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and type
of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
● No objects should be placed o
ver or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
● Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
● Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury
in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags
will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some
that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and
angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects
a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front
air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
SAFETY 237
6
● Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam.
Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor.
The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine
the front passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The
ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as
designed, it is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the OCS estimates that:
● The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
● The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deploy-
ment
Child, including a child in
a f
orward-facing child re-
straint or booster seat*
Reduced-power deploy-
ment OR full-power de-
ployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
ployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deploy-
ment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an
adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child restraint
system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the
front passenger seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Ne
ver install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
● Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated
weight on the front passenger seat and where
that weight is located. The OCS communicates the
classification status to the ORC. The ORC uses the
classification to determine whether the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
● Sitting upright
● Facing forward
● Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
● Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
238 SAFET
Y
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is
working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS
determines the most probable classification of the
occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front
passenger’s decreased or increased seated weight,
which may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on
the front passenger seat may result in a full-power
deplo
yment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
● The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest
or instrument panel).
● The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
● The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
● The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
● Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
● Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
● Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
● Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is different
from the occupant’s properly seated weight input, for
example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
SAFETY 239
6
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
● If a child restraint system, child, small teenager
or adult in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the
(Continued)
WARNING!
occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
● Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing
forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
● Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different than the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, which
may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
● Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger,
the OCS components must function as designed. Do
not make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
● Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
● Do not use prior or future model year seat covers
or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the
vehicle.
● Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
● Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
● At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related component
or fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
● U
napproved modifications or service procedures
to the passenger seat assembly, its related
components, seat cover or cushion may
inadvertently change the air bag deployment in
case of a frontal collision. This could result in
death or serious injury to the front passenger
if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
(Continued)
240 SAFETY
WARNING!
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
● If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occup-
ants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
● Do no
t drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
● Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating
SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge
SAFETY 241
6
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure
occupants if they are not belted and seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
● Do no
t mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and its
deployment path are located should remain free
from any obstructions.
● In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated
to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of
the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the
passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
● Occupants, including children, who are up against
or v
ery close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
● Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear
their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be properly
(Continued)
WARNING!
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
● Side Air Bags need r
oom to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
● Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured
or killed.
● Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt
pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
242 SAFETY
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument Panel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Supplemental Knee Air Bags
● Front and Side Impact Sensors
● Seat Belt Pretensioners
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The fr
ont air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
● The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants
as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions
are similar to friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They
are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly. However,
if you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
● As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If
the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these
particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
● Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
● After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
● Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
● Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
● Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
● Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from
the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System.
● Unlock the power door locks.
SAFETY 243
6
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced
Accident Response System:
● Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
● Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic transmission gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to place the ignition in
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices
(e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by
following the procedure described below. If you have
any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
R
eset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to
ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
● Modif
ications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
● It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally
or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat,
including your trim cover and cushion, needs to
be serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
● How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
● Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
244 SAFET
Y
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According
to crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
● For additional information, refer to
http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
● Canadian residents should refer to
Transport Canada’s website for additional
information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have
no
t reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
SAFETY 245
6
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing
direction are for children who are over two years old
or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle,
do not move the vehicle seat forward or
rearward because it can loosen the child restraint
attachments. Remove the child restraint before
adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the
vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
(Continued)
246 SAFETY
WARNING!
● When y
our child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or
seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back
of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the
front of the vehicle seat while the child is still
sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt,
check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat
belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching
can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt
contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position
the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X
SAFETY 247
6
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install
the child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
R
estraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (5 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (7 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Captain’s Chairs Second Row
LATCH Positions (6 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
248 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5
kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
No — 5 Passenger
N/A — 6 Passenger
No — 7 Passenger
7 and 5 Passenger: Use the seat belt and tether anchor
to install a child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con-
tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
SAFETY 249
6
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback. They are just
visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if
you run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
Five Passenger Rear Seat Lower Anchorages
Six Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Seven Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Five Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row Upper Tether
Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat. To access them, pull the
carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Five Passenger)
Five Passenger Top Tether Strap Mounting
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 2nd Row Upper
Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat.
250 SAFET
Y
Six Passenger Top Tether
Strap Mounting (Captain's Chair)
Seven Passenger Top Tether
Strap Mounting (2nd Row Bench)
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 3rd Row Upper
Te
ther Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat. To
access them, pull the carpeted floor panel away from
the seat back, this will expose the top tether strap
anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To
Access Top Tether Strap (3rd Row Bench)
Tether Anchorages (3rd Row Bench)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on
each side. Each will have a hook or connector to
attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten
the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will
have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Five Or Seven
Passenger Vehicles Second Row Seating
Only
WARNING!
● Do no
t install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position is
not approved for installing child seats using the
LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt
and tether anchor to install a child seat in the
center seating position.
● Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. For typical
installation instructions, see
page 252.
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether —
Fiv
e Or Se
v
en P
assenger Seating Only
F
or rear
-f
acing child restraints secured in the cent
er
seat position with the v
ehicle seat belts, the rear cent
er
seat position has an armrest t
ether that secures the
arm rest in the upward position.
SAFETY 251
6
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first
lower the arm rest. The tether is located behind
the armrest and hooked onto the plastic seat
backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the
plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to
the strap located on the front of the arm rest.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the
seat belt, following the instructions below. See
page 234
to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on
the tether strap of the child seat so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the
vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat
can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward
and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for
the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it
to the top tether anchorage. See
page 255 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to secure
child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if
they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the
LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled
seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation,
instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and
then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys
and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
(Continued)
252 SAFETY
WARNING!
● Child restraint anchorages are designed t
o
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-
fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses,
or for attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
● Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion
of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it
is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor
can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the
webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked,
the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor
page 234.
Please see the table below and the following sections
for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row (5 Passenger)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 253
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with
an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
● Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined,
you may recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the
belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat
belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step
5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint while you
push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether anchorage,
connect the tether strap to the anchorage and
254 SAFETY
tighten the tether strap. For directions to attach
a tether anchor, see
page 255.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat, including
the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach
the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the
tether anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See
page 248 for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan
to install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat
forward to provide better access to the tether
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind
the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away
from the seat back, this will expose the top tether
strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Five Passenger)
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor
Panel To Access Top Tether Strap
Anchorage (6 and 7 Passenger Seating)
Third Row Top Tether Strap
Anchorage (6 and 7 Passenger Seating)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and
the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with
adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head
restraint, and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint
and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether
strap over the seatback and headrest then attach
the hook to the tether anchor located on the back
of the seat.
SAFETY 255
6
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the
diagram.
Bench Seat Top Tether Strap
Mounting (5 Passenger Seating)
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether
Strap Mounting (7 Passenger Seating)
Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting
Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
● The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind
the seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● An incorrectly anchored t
ether strap could lead
to increased head motion and possible injury to
the child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint
top tether strap.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
256 SAFETY
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped)
in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer to
“Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity”
page 88.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE
THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first placed in the
ON/RUN mode. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until
the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
page 229.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the windshield.
See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.
Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the
floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
● ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or
turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
● ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat
on top of an existing floor mat.
● ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor
(Continued)
SAFETY 257
6
WARNING!
mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific make, model,
and year of your vehicle.
● ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with
the vehicle properly parked with the engine off,
fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference.
If your floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
● ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
● ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
● NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change
the position of the floor mat and may cause
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
● If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to
the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● It is recommended t
o only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using the
floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH when using
“Track-Use” parts and equipment:
● NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment on public
roads. FCA US LLC does not authorize the use of
“Track-Use” equipment on public roads.
● The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is for race
vehicles on race tracks. To help ensure the safety
of the race driver, engineers should supervise the
installation of “Track-Use” parts.
● FCA US LLC does not authorize the installation or
use of any part noted as “Track-Use” on any new
vehicle prior to its first retail sale.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
● AL
WAYS remove any “Track-Use” equipment before
driving on public roads.
● ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat belts
when driving on public roads.
● In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle.
258 SAFETY
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
● Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
● If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
● If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required. The best protection
against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is
a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the
vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect
the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
● Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such
as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
● Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any
abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until
repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
SAFETY 259
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
switch bank just below the climate controls.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the button a second time
to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With e
xtended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
discharge the battery.
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
SOS And ASSIST Mirror
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
r
oad. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
(Continued)
WARNING!
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an SOS and
ASSIST button.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
page 342.
● The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data), 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if
your Brand Connect service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data), 4G
(data) network.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to an SOS operator.
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the
SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
260 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green
once a connection to an SOS operator has been
made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to an SOS operator:
● Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
● The vehicle brand
● The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
NOTE:
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
operator may be able to open a voice connection
with the vehicle to determine if additional
assistance is needed. Once the SOS operator
opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS
Call system, the operator should be able to speak
with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s
SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS operator
terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and provide
them with important vehicle information and GPS
coordinates.
WARNING!
● If an
yone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe
location.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable network
and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
● The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical
system. This may prevent your vehicle from
sending a signal to initiate an emergency call.
To avoid interference that can cause the SOS
Call system to fail, never add aftermarket
equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN
ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
● Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of
the following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
● The Rearview Mirror light located between the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate
red.
● The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
● An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
● Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
● The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the system
is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the
Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 261
7
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
● The ignition is in the OFF position
● The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
● The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
● The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
● LTE (voice/data), 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
● Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
● Operator error by the SOS operator
● LTE (voice/data), 4G (data) network congestion
● Weather
● Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data), 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data), 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data), 4G (data) network connection and a GPS
signal is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
● Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your
provided radio supplement for complete information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
● Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need
a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will
be connected to a representative for assistance.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re
driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for
roadside assistance.
● Brand Connect Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Brand Connect.
● Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
● Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spra
y any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
● Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
● Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
● The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used
to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
262 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if changing the driver’s front tire, block
the passenger’s rear tire.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being raised or lifted.
RUN FLAT TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
SRT models are equipped with “run flat” tires. Run flat
tires allow the vehicle to be driven approximately 50
miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h). Tire service should
be obtained to avoid prolonged run flat feature usage
page 320.
WARNING!
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light is illuminated.
Vehicle handling and braking may be reduced. You
could have a collision and be severely or fatally
injured.
JACK LOCATION — IF EQUIPPED
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
Load Floor Handle
Lift up on the load floor handle to access the jack and
tools in the cargo area.
Jack And Tools Storage Cover
To remove, press down firmly on the upper tabs of the
jack storage cover to release.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 263
7
Thumb Screw Location
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of the jack
to loosen the jack and remove from the bracket.
Jack Removal
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at
the center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the
liftgate opening.
Spare Tire Location
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench e
xtension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
S
PARE TIRE REMOVAL —
I
F E
QUIPPED
R
emo
v
e the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
vehicle. The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear
cargo area on the outside of the vehicle.
For spare tire removal, see the following steps:
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from
storage compartment floor.
Winch Plug Location
264 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE — IF EQUIPPED
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to
the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut.
Use the lug wrench handle and extension to
completely lower the spare tire. Keep turning the
handle counterclockwise until the winch stops.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air
wrench or power tool may damage the winch.
Winch Location
Wrench Rotation
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate
it vertically behind the rear fascia/bumper.
Spare Tire
NOTE:
The vehicle may come equipped with a metal
retainer only when removing the spare
page
322
.
5. Pull the metal stamping toward you.
Spare Tire Retainer
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension
tube and winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping
and push it through the hole of the wheel.
Sleeve And Cable
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
pre
vent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
● Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
● Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
● Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
● Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
● Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265
7
WARNING!
● Do no
t let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
● Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
● Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
● If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
● To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel
is still on the ground.
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack And Tool Assembly
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See the following images for proper
jacking locations.
Jacking Locations
3. For the front tire, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire. Do
not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
fully engaged.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove
the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and
install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
st
em facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel
blocks.
9. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in
a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been
tightened twice. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station
page 330.
10. Push out the small center cap using the jack tool
from inside the aluminum road wheel and position
the wheel behind the rear fascia/bumper.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 267
7
11. Push the end of the winch’s cable, spring and steel
sleeve through the back of the road wheel. Making
sure the valve stem is facing the ground when the
wheel is stowed.
Installing Winch
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground until it is
directly under the winch and between the rear
fascia/bumper and exhaust system heat shields.
Raise the tire by turning the lug wrench on the
winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets
three times to make sure the cable is tight.
Wrench Rotation
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against
the underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch
cable may result if the vehicle is driven with the
tire loose.
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack wrench e
xtension tool only. Use of air
wrench or power tool may damage the winch.
13. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
14. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return
the tools to the proper positions in the tool bag.
Fold the flap on the tool bag under the tools and
roll the tools in the bag underneath the others.
Use the hook and loop fasteners to secure the tool
bag to the jack with the lug wrench on the forward
side of the jack. Expand the jack on the bracket by
turning the thumb screw clockwise until it is tight
to prevent rattles.
15. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the
jack in the rear storage bin.
16. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired
as soon as possible and properly secure the spare
tire, jack and tool kit.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire
in the places provided.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery
in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery
booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done
improperly, so please follow the procedures in this
section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located under the
passenger's front seat. There are remote terminals
located under the hood to assist in jump starting.
UnderHood Jump Starting Location
Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective
Cap)
Remote Negative (-) Post (Covered With Protective
Cap)
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not touch
each other, or either vehicle, before properly connected
for jump starting.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition
OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote
positive (+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover
to remove it.
4. Remove the protective cover over the remote
negative (-) battery post.
5. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach,
apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition
is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
● T
ake care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime
(Continued)
WARNING!
the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
● Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
● Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
JUMP ST
ARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle
while making connections.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269
7
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the discharge
vehicle) located on the right hand side next to the
underhood fuse box.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
engine.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative (-) post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of
the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective covers over the remote
positive (+) and negative (-) posts of the
discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
have the battery and charging system tested at an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF
EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
capless fuel system. The fuel funnel can be found in
the rear cargo area with the jack and tools. If refueling
is necessary, while using an approved gas can, insert
the refueling funnel into the filler neck opening. Take
care to open both flapper doors with the funnel to avoid
spills.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
● Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
● A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Refueling Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel
is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the rear cargo storage area.
Refueling Funnel Location
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the
fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating can be:
● Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
● Strong smell of coolant
● White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
● Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close
to the HOT (H) position, take the following actions to
reduce the potential for overheating.
● On highways — slow down.
● In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
● Turn off the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C system
adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
● Turn the temperature control to maximum heat and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids
in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
v
ehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 271
7
CAUTION!
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal
when activating the Manual Park Release. Activating
the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to
roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or
by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
lead to serious injury or death for those in or around
the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual
Park Release cover, remove it by snapping the
cover away from the console hinges.
Manual Park Release Cover
NOTE:
Depending on your vehicle’s trim level, the Manual
Park Release cable may be located in a different
area on the center console.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal
latch in towards the tether strap.
Release Latch
5. While the metal latch is in the open position,
pull upward on the tether strap until the lever
clicks and latches in the released position. The
transmission is now out of PARK (P) and the
vehicle can be moved.
Released Position
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release
is activ
ated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally, firmly
apply the parking brake.
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release, apply
tension upward while pushing the release latch
towards the tether to unlock the lever.
Release Latch
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever
has been unlocked, be sure it is stowed properly
and locks into position.
Stowed Position
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in place.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on
the gear selector. Then, shift back and forth between
DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N)
for more than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
page 217. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button again
to restore ESC On mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
(Continued)
WARNING!
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
● Racing the engine or spinning the wheels ma
y
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
● When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
● Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described
under
page 133.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
7
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Rear-Wheel Drive Models All-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed Transfer
Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed Transfer
Case
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Detailed Instructions
page 133
● Transmission in PARK
● Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
● Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on
shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in
order to move the vehicle can be found on
page
272
.
CAUTION!
● Do no
t use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
● When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
REAR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the trans-
mission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with
rear wheels off the ground) under the following
conditions:
● The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). For
instructions on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL
(N) when the engine is off
page 272.
● The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
pre
v
ent damage t
o y
our v
ehicle. Use only tow bars and
other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety
chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State and local
laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
● The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on
a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
front wheels
ON the ground.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels OFF
the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer
case may be towed (in the forward direction, with
ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK
page
133
.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case
have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore
must be
towed will all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
● F
ront or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
● Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously
mentioned requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
TOWING A DISABLED SRT VEHICLE
FCA requires towing your vehicle with all four wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, instructions on shifting the transmission
out of PARK (P) for loading onto a flatbed truck
page 272
.
CAUTION!
● T
owing this vehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage.
● Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the event of an impact
page 243.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record
data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed under certain crash or near crash-
like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle
page 244.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This means
that service is required for your vehicle. Operating
conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow,
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and
E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
● Check engine oil level
● Check windshield washer fluid level
● Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage
● Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and fill as needed
● Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for required
maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
● Change oil and f
ilter.
● Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
● Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
● Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
● Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
● Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
● Inspect exhaust system.
● Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change
if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-
road or frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake func-
tion.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
8
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10
years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) which-
ever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt. X
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner and
pulley, replace if necessary.
X
Change transfer case fluid - Normal Usage. X
Change transfer case fluid - Severe Usage
(police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing).
X X
Replace PCV valve. X
1
The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
278 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
WARNING!
● Y
ou can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
● Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
SCHEDULED SERVICING — SRT
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages
specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure
the best vehicle performance and reliability. More
frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in
severe operating conditions, such as dusty areas and
very short trip driving. Inspection and service should
also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
The instrument cluster display will display an “Oil
Change R
equired” message and a single chime will
sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that
service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
NOTE:
● The oil change indicator message will not monitor
the time since the last oil change. Change your
vehicle's oil if it has been six months since your last
oil change, even if the oil change indicator message
is NOT illuminated.
● Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
● Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months,
whichever comes first.
At Each Stop For Fuel
● Check the engine oil level.
● Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
● Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
● Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the
terminals as required.
● Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, engine
oil, brake master cylinder, and add as needed.
● Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
● Change the engine oil filter.
● Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
● Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
● Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
8
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset
by referring to the steps described under instrument
cluster display
page 74.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
MAINTENANCE PLAN — SRT
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months:
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
102
108
114
120
126
132
138
144
150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs be-
fore scheduled maintenance.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
If using your vehicle for any of the fol-
lowing: dusty or off-road conditions. In-
spect the engine air cleaner filter; re-
place if necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months:
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
102
108
114
120
126
132
138
144
150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Inspect the exhaust system. X X X X X X X X X X X X
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
X X X X X
Drain the transfer case and refill. X X X X X
Inspect the accessory drive belts re-
place if necessary.
X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and boot seals, for cracks or leaks and
all parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if neces-
sary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary.
X
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
8
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months:
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
102
108
114
120
126
132
138
144
150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change front and rear axle fluid. X X X X X
Change transfer case fluid. X X
Replace the spark plugs – 6.2L Super-
charged Engine.
2
X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 120 months if no
t done at 150,000
miles (240,000 km).
X X
WARNING!
● You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
(Continued)
WARNING!
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
● F
ailure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
(Continued)
WARNING!
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
2
The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not apply.
282 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
5 — Engine Oil Fill
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
8
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.2L SUPERCHARGED ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 11 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
6 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
8
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
● Crosshatched zone.
● Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
● Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
● Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
y
our engine.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The instrument cluster display will indicate when the
washer fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a
low fluid level, the Low Washer Fluid Warning Light will
illuminate and the "Washer Fluid Low" message will
display.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check
the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade
performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield
washer system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range
of your climate. This rating information can be found on
most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. Water will never have to be added, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
● Batt
ery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not
lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water.
● Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster source
with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
● Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
● It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached
to the negative post. Battery posts are marked
positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on
the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on
the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
● If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery.
Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting
voltage.
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts
and connections however, the pressures generated
by these machines is such that complete protection
against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform
all service operations in an expert manner. Service
Manuals are available which include detailed service
information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service
Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection — Non-SRT
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
page 334
.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup and
then quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is
normal and will not harm the engine. This characteristic
can be caused by short drive cycles. For example, if
the vehicle is started then shut off after driving a short
distance. Upon restarting, you may experience a ticking
sound. Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused
for an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine continues
to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
Engine Oil Selection — SRT
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
page 336
.
NOTE:
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup and
then quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This is
normal and will not harm the engine. This characteristic
can be caused by short drive cycles. For example, if
the vehicle is started then shut off after driving a short
distance. Upon restarting, you may experience a ticking
sound. Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused
for an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine continues
to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademark oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage y
our engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
8
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filter varies
considerably. We recommend using a MOPAR® engine
oil filter. If a MOPAR® engine oil filter is unavailable,
only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36
Filter performance requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 276.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
can provide a measure of protection in the case
of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal
is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure
(Continued)
WARNING!
that no one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably.
Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be
used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the engine air
cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Spring Clips
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the engine air
cleaner filter cover to the housing assembly.
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — SRT
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners on the engine air cleaner
cover filter.
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air cleaner
filter assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter
cover lid screws or damage may result.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
● Use only refrigerants and com
pressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring
costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● The air conditioning syst
em contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
substance. The manufacturer recommends that air
conditioning service be performed by an authorized
dealer or other service facilities using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-
friendly substance with a low global-warming potential.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
8
The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 276.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both
sides of the glove compartment door. Partially
close the glove compartment door and push
inward to release the glove compartment travel
stop on one side and repeat this procedure for the
opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment
door toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage
the glove compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove
the glove compartment tension tether and tether
clip by sliding the clip toward the face of the glove
compartment door and lifting the clip out of glove
compartment door.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the
retaining tab and mid way snap that secures the
filter cover to the HVAC housing. Disengage the
mid way snap by pulling the door outward. Unhinge
the filter cover on the right side to fully remove the
cover.
Cabin Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out
of the housing.
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully
engage the cover.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the door
hinge and reattach the tension tether by inserting
the tether clip in the glove compartment and
sliding the clip away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to
reengage the glove compartment travel stops.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
● When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any time
regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured
by the moving fan blades.
● You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across the ribbed surface of the belt from rib to rib,
are considered normal. This is not a reason to replace
belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are
not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must
be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
● Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
● Rib or belt wear
● Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
● Belt slips
● Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
● Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new
belt is installed)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
8
● Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
● Wear or uneven edges
● Foreign material
● Hardening or cracking
● Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
ma
y be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up
position.
Wiper Blade With Release
Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use
of special tools. We recommend having your vehicle
serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items
as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers,
liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges,
should be lubricated periodically. Use a lithium-based
grease, such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and
while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide
the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release
Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper
blade from the wiper arm with the other hand
(move the wiper blade toward the right side of the
vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper
arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper
arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip
of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open
and the blade side of the wiper facing up and away
from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush
against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release
tab and snap it into its locked position. Latch
engagement will be accompanied by an audible
click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1
.
Lif
t the rear wiper arm piv
o
t cap a
wa
y fr
om the
glass t
o allo
w the rear wiper blade to be raised off
of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
8
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest
to wiper arm with your right hand. With your left
hand hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper
blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far
enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from
the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the
glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the
glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off
of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of
the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into
place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil changes.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
● Exhaust gases can injure or kill. The
y contain
Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO see
page 256.
● A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
● The catalytic con
verter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device and may seriously reduce engine
performance and cause serious damage to the
engine.
● Damage to the catalytic converter can result
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle
serviced promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause
the converter to overheat, resulting in possible
damage to the converter and vehicle.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
● Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
● Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
● You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
● Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
● When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition is
in the ON mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front
of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator.
Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE
THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 276.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information
page 334.
NOTE:
● Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
8
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to the manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant
is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
● Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use
of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact
an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period,
it is important to use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
● We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
● Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
● Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
● It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle
is operated.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system, please contact
an authorized dealer.
● Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT
and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon
as possible.
Cooling Syst
em Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is
any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
● Do no
t open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine
is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
● Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by
animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills
immediately. If ingested, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
296 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
“MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked
once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or
high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being
vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
● Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
● Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
● If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
● Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
● Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
● Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
● Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 276.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master
Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
Brake System Warning Light is on. If necessary, add
fluid to bring level within the designated marks on
the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can
be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid
level should be checked when pads are replaced. If
the brake fluid is abnormally low, check the system for
leaks. For further information
page 335.
WARNING!
● Use only the manuf
acturer’s recommended brake
fluid
page 335. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
● To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in an open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
8
WARNING!
● Ov
erfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
● Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
AUT
OMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special A
dditiv
es
The manuf
acturer str
ongly recommends against using
an
y special additives in the transmission. A
ut
omatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to
the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check y
our transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer's specified transmission
fluid page 335. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder
page 335.
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly
should be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect
the fluid level.
Adding Fluid
With the vehicle in a level position, fill the transfer case
to bottom edge of fill plug opening.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs
is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
● When replacing a blo
wn fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. The use
of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload.
If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected. Never replace a blown fuse with metal
wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse
inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
● Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
● If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
● If a general pr
otection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
8
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8
inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
page 335
.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
page 335
.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8
inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center
and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery jump start posts. This
center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and
component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped
on the inside cover that corresponds to the following
chart.
Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F02 – – Spare
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan *
F04 60 Amp Yellow – ESP Pump Non-SRT
F05 40 Amp Green – Air Suspension Comp *
F06 40 Amp Green – ABS Pump SRT
F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F08 – – Spare
F09 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Fuel Htr * / VAC PUMP *
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / EXT Light
F11 30 Amp Pink – Trlr Tow Brake *
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / Pwr Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLWR MTR
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / Ext Light
F15 40 Amp Green – LTR Engine Cooling *
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F16 – – Spare
F17 30 Amp Pink – HDLP Washers *
F18 – – Spare
F19 20 Amp Blue – Solenoid Headrest *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Pass Door Mod
F21 – – Spare
F22 20 Amp Blue – ECM * / PCM *
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / Int Light
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Mod
F25 30 Amp Pink – Ft Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink – ESP / ECU Valves
F27 – – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trlr Tow B/U *
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trlr Tow Park *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trlr Tow Pwr *
F31 – – Spare
F32 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F33 – – Spare
F34 30 Amp Pink – ELSD *
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof *
F36 30 Amp Pink – EBL
F37 25 Amp Clear – HVAC RR Blower MTR *
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter
F39 30 Amp Pink – PLG
F40 – 10 Amp Red DRL / HEADLAMP LVL *
F41 – – Spare
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – – Spare
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security MOD
F46 – – Spare
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red ICS / HVAC
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Mod * / ELSD *
F51 – 15 Amp Blue KIN / RF HUB / ESCL *
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trlr Tow LT Turn / Stop *
F54 – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – 15 Amp Blue PCM *
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX Snsrs * / PM Snsrs * / Fuel HTR *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LT *
F59 – 10 Amp Red SCR Pump Relay *
F60 – 15 Amp Blue TCM
F61 – 10 Amp Red PM Sensor *
F62 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils */ Ignition Coil Capacitors*
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / ECM
F65 – – Spare
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof */ LRSM */ RVM / DSRC / USB Port / DTV * / WCP *
F67 – 15 Amp Blue CDM/UCI Port/USB Port
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper Mtr
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Spot Light Feed *
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Mtr
F71 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier */ ANCM *
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F72 – 10 Amp Red ECM * / PCM *
F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RT *
F74 – – Spare
F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Ctrl *
F76 – 10 Amp Red ESP
F77 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / ELSD *
F78 – 10 Amp Red ECM / PCM * / EPS
F79 – – Spare
F80 – 10 Amp Red UGDO
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trlr Tow RT Turn / Stop *
F82 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / Cruise Control / DTV *
F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F86 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension Mod *
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster / CSG * / ITBM *
F89 – – Spare
F90 – – Spare
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Pwr Outlet Cargo Area
F92 – 10 Amp Red Rr Console Lamp * / RR Pwr Outlet
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Sbw / Tcase Sw
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rr Cam / Blind Spot Snsr *
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rr Seat Heater Sw*
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Rr Htd Sts / Htd Str Wheel *
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Htd Sts * / Vent Sts
F99 – 10 Amp Red Hvac / Dash / Hlfm/ Prktronx
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping *
F101 – 15 Amp Blue In Car Temp Sensor / Humidity Sensor
F102 – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F103 – 10 Amp Red PTC / RR HVAC *
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUT-IP / Console / Trnk
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
8
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam/LED Headlamps LED
Front Turn Signal Lamps (Bulb Reflector) 7444NA
Front DRL/Turn/Park Lamp (Premium) LED
Front DRL/Park Lamp (Base) LED
Front Side Marker Lamps LED
Front Fog Lamps LED
Rear Tail Lamps/Side Marker Lamps LED
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Stop/Turn Signal Lamps LED
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps LED
Rear Backup Lamps 922 or 912
Rear License Lamps LED
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Rotate the turn signal bulb a quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace
the bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
The front fog lamps are LEDs. See an authorized dealer
for service.
REAR TAIL, STOP AND TURN SIGNAL LAMPS
The rear tail, stop, and turn signal lamps are LED. See
an authorized dealer for replacement.
REAR LIFTGATE MOUNTED BACK-UP LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry
the lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Back-up lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s)
counterclockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s).
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP
(CHMSL)
The Center High Mounted Stop Lamp is an LED
assembly. See an authorized dealer for replacement.
REAR LICENSE LAMP
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See an authorized
dealer for service.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
8
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
NOTE:
● P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
● European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
● LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for LT-
Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
e
xcept for the letters “LT” that are molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
● Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
● High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = P
assenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification
Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire
Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
EXAMPLE:
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
● Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
● "R" means radial construction, or
● "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diame
ter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
● A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
● A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
● The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
8
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
●
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
●
LL = Light load tire or
●
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicat
es the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
● This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 01 means the year 2001
● Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
8
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle.
You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity
if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and
cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire And
Loading Information Placard page 125.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing page 125.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in
step 4.
NOTE:
● If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The
following table shows examples on how to calculate
total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate
for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
● For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
8
(1) Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650
lbs.)
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
● Safety
● Fuel Economy
● Tread Wear
● Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
● Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
(Continued)
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
● U
nderinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
● Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
● Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
● Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
● Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift
to the right or left.
● Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
● Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
● Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
● Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated.
● Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
alw
a
ys reinstall the v
alv
e st
em cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is def
ined as the tire pressure af
t
er the v
ehicle has no
t
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and
the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold
tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21
kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C)
for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at
high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure
is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
8
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
● The tire has not been driven on when flat.
● The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
● The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6
mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and Speed
Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it
is no
t designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of
inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred
to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs
when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat
mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
When a Run Flat tire is changed after being driven in
a Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please
replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be
reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
(Continued)
WARNING!
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
tire should be replaced.
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
● Driving style
● Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
● Distance driven
● Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
y
ears, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends
using tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality
and performance when replacement is needed
page 320
. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
Placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed
Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire
page 312.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
● Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
(Continued)
WARNING!
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
● Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
● Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
8
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow
or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires,
be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the
use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow
tires can be identified by a “mountain/
snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size
and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect
the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75
mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120
km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
page
131
.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in
the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has
this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall
of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with
the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17
101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since
the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible
spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same
as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on
the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the
driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like
the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of
your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel.
Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed
on your Tire And Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
(Continued)
WARNING!
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall
it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with
the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused
by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and
automatic car washes may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
8
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar®
Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their
equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following
snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
● Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
● No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
● Please follow the table for the recommended tire
size, axle and snow traction device:
RWD
T
rim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
SPECIAL SERVICE
Rear
P265/60R18
THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
SXT
265/60R18
265/50R20
GT
R/T
CITADEL
265/50R20
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
PURSUIT
Rear
255/60R18
THULE XG-12 PRO or Equivalent
SXT
265/60R18
265/50R20
GT
R/T
CITADEL
265/50R20
SRT 392
SRT Hellcat
295/45ZR20
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
● Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components,
it is important that only traction devices in good
(Continued)
CAUTION!
condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
noise occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
● Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8
km). Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
● Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
● Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Do no
t drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
● Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use. Always
use the suggested operating speed of the device
manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48
km/h).
● Do not use traction devices on a compact spare
tire.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
8
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-
Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help
to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 276.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically
locate the pressure values displayed in the correct
vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned
by the tire's manufacturer in each
category is shown on the sidewall of
the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these
grades.
TREADWEAR
The T
readw
ear grade is a com
parativ
e
rating, based on the w
ear rat
e
of the tire when test
ed under
contr
olled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat, when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps
to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
● Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
● Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.
BATTERY STORAGE MODE
With the ignition in the ON position, engine not running,
navigate to the battery gauge page on the instrument
cluster display, then press and hold the OK button. The
vehicle will be put into battery storage mode, which
will greatly increase the amount of time the vehicle
can sit and restart without needing to disconnect the
battery. Going into battery storage mode will increase
the amount of time between starts to about 60 days.
NOTE:
The key fob buttons will not work while the vehicle is
in battery storage mode, pulling the door handle will
wake the vehicle and allow it to recognize the key fob to
unlock the door.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other
seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your
vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle
to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and
other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on
paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
● Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
8
● Stone and gravel impact.
● Insects, tree sap and tar.
● Salt in the air near seacoast localities
● Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and
fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
● Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with water.
● If insects, tar
, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super
Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
● Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
● Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
● Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
● Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
● If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
● It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
● If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
● If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
possible.
● If y
ou carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
● If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
● Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint
to match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Man
y are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the
belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do
not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or
if you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
● Direct contact of air freshener
s, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior
may cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately.
● Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of
dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery,
as damage to the upholstery may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on a label located on the left front
corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside
of the vehicle through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Label Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of overall
braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal
travel during application, greater pedal force required
to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
W
arning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required
to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on
the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using
a properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Base Model Vehicle
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 ft-lb (176
N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
SRT Model Vehicle
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
110 ft-lb (149
N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it half way).
330 TECHNICAL SPECIFICA
TIONS
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer
or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque
to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly
tightened.
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do no
t tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine
is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is
heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when using
high quality unleaded regular gasoline
having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
premium gasoline is not required, as it will not provide
any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet
all emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded gasoline
having an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane plus gasoline is
recommended for optimum performance and fuel
economy.
6.2L SUPERCHARGED ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations, provide optimal fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded premium gasoline
having a posted octane number of 91 as specified by
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
premium gasoline is required for this engine.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 331
9
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and fuel
system deposits. When available, the usage
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed the
applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe pump
labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel
contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
● Operate in a lean mode.
● OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
● Poor engine performance.
● Poor cold start and cold drivability.
● Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP)
may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and
fuel system components. Problems that result from
running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL MANGANESE
TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN GASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that
is blended into some gasolines to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in
your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be
indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should
ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
per
formance:
● The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine
performance and damage the emissions control
system.
● An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
● The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products contain
high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and
may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
332 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active
solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel
system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines 24.6 gal 93 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 qt 5.6 L
5.7L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine – Without Trailer Tow Package 10.4 qt 9.9 L
3.6L Engine – With Trailer Tow Package 11 qt 10.4 L
5.7L Engine – Without Trailer Tow Package 15.4 qt 14.6 L
5.7L Engine – With Trailer Tow Package 16 qt 15.2 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 333
9
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 24.6 gal 93.0 L
Engine Oil With Filter
6.2L Engine 8.3 qt 7.8 L
Cooling System*
6.2L Engine 14.7 qt 13.9 L
6.2L Engine Intercooler 4.0 qt 3.9 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000
km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of the man-
ufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
334 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Oil – 3.6L & 5.7L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets
the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full
synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trade-
mark
page 287.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method , 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol
(Do not use E-85).
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your trans-
mission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear) – Without Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with inte-
grated friction modifier.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 335
9
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT
Component Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
Engine/Intercooler Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000
km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil
which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-12633.
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be used but must have the API
Donut trademark
page 287.
Fuel Selection
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher (R+M)/2 method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not
use E-85).
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your trans-
mission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85 with inte-
grated friction modifier.
336 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3
SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
If using DOT 4 brake fluid, the fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is
time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 337
9
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need
a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best,
and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools,
and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
● Owner's name and address
● Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
● Authorized dealer name
● Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
● Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com (USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if
you are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles
on the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated
from the start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as
set forth in your Warranty Information book.
3
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of
gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing
as a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free:
USA: 1-800-521-2779/Canada: 800-363-4869. Provide
your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required
for covered services, license plate number, and your
location, including the telephone number from which
3
Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc. Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services are provided by Cross Country
Motor Club of California, Inc., Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
338 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of the
problem and answer a few simple questions. You will
be given the name of the service provider and an
estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an
unsafe situation, please let us know. With your consent,
we will contact local police or safety authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed
towing or service facility, for services rendered within
30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your
VIN, odometer mileage at the time of service, and
current mailing address. We will process the claim
based on vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we
will reimburse you for the reasonable amount actually
paid, based on the usual and customary charges for
that service in the area where they were provided. FCA
US LLC’s determination relating to reimbursement is
final. Correspondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
A claim can also be submitted online at: https://
stellantis.roadsidereimbursement.com
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at
any time. The Roadside Assistance program is subject
to restrictions and conditions of use, which are
determined solely by FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch
a service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare
tire (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s
Manual. This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home.
We will dispatch a service provider to deliver a small
amount of fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you
to a nearby station. This service is limited to two
occurrences in a 12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help
is just a phone call away. This service is limited to
providing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does
not cover the cost of replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a
result of a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance
will dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle
to the closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or
Ram dealer. If you choose to go to another dealer, you
will be responsible for the cost of the extra distance.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA CANADA CUSTOMER CARE
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French
MEXICO
Customer Relations Office
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Santa Fe Cuajimalpa, Cuajimalpa de Morelos
Ciudad de México, C.P. 05348
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 339
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING
OR SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by
FCA US LLC to provide additional protection beyond
your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a Mopar®
Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within
three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call FCA US
LLC’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased
additional coverage with an extended service contract.
FCA Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service
contracts. Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine
Canada Inc. service contract. We are not responsible
for other companies’ contracts. If you purchased a
contract other than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service
contract and you have a problem, you will have to
contact the administrator of that contract for resolution.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
call the FCA's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased
additional coverage with an extended service contract.
FCA Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service
contracts. Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine
Canada Inc. service contract. We are not responsible
for other companies’ contracts. If you purchased a
contract other than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service
contract and you have a problem, you will have to
contact the administrator of that contract for resolution.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
call the FCA's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-844-472-6301 (844-GRAND01) English /
1-844-472-6301 (844-GRAND01) French).
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plans offer valuable
protection against repair costs after your vehicle
warranties have expired. Mopar Vehicle Protection
plans are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans
authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC
to provide additional protection beyond your vehicle's
warranty.
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
See the Warranty Information for
the terms and provisions of FCA
US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer
to www.mopar.com/om for further
information.
In Canada:
See the Warranty Information for the terms
and provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further information.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr/ for
further information.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to
keep it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
340 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US
LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, an authorized dealer
or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,
you should contact the Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report
a safety defect to the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go
to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
ORDERING AND ACCESSING ADDITIONAL
OWNER’S INFORMATION
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components and is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly
how to find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway
at:
●
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
● Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
● Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
● Exact Odometer Reading
● First and Last Name
● Phone Number
● Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
● Email Address
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 341
10
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
*Applies to US residents only.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. Es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. Este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
342 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ...........................................
330
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control) ....................................................107, 108
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ................296
Adding Fuel ...................................................... 124
Additives, Fuel ..................................................331
Adjust
Down ..............................................................31
Forward ..........................................................31
Rearward ....................................................... 31
Up ...................................................................31
Advance Phone Connectivity .......................... 185
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ....................................... 237
Air Bag Warning Light ........................235, 237
Driver Knee Air Bag .................................... 241
Enhanced Accident Response .......... 243, 275
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ........................275
Front Air Bag ............................................... 237
If Deployment Occurs .................................243
Knee Impact Bolsters .................................241
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............. 244
Maintenance ...............................................244
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 236
Side Air Bags ............................................... 241
Transporting Pets ........................................257
Air Bag Light ..................................... 81, 235, 257
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ................................................................ 288
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..........................289
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ............................. 289
Air Conditioner System ....................................289
Air Conditioning
Rear ............................................................... 50
Air Conditioning Filter ......................53, 288–290
Air Conditioning System .................................... 52
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................... 52
Air Filter ............................................................288
Air Pressure
Tires .............................................................319
Alarm
Arm The System ............................................20
Disarm The System .......................................20
Rearm The System ....................................... 20
Security Alarm ...............................................83
Alarm System
Security Alarm ...............................................20
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ........................................99
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle ........................................................... 10
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 215
Anti-Lock Warning Light .....................................83
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......... 295, 333, 334
Disposal ...................................................... 296
Assist, Hill Start ............................................... 219
Audio Settings ..................................................175
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................... 140
Auto Down Power Windows ...............................62
Automatic Headlights ........................................ 42
Automatic High Beams ......................................42
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .............. 52
Automatic Transmission ............................. 90, 96
Adding Fluid ....................................... 298, 336
Fluid And Filter Change ..............................298
Fluid Change ...............................................298
Fluid Level Check ....................................... 298
Fluid Type .................................. 298, 335, 336
Special Additives ........................................ 298
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ..... 97
AutoPark ............................................................. 91
Auxiliary Driving Systems ................................ 220
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......... 57
Auxiliary Power Outlet ........................................ 57
Auxiliary Switches .............................................. 60
Axle Fluid ..........................................................335
Axle Lubrication ............................................... 336
343
11
B
B-Pillar Location ...............................................
316
Battery ....................................................... 82, 286
Charging System Light ..................................82
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .....................15
Battery Saver Feature ........................................43
Belts, Seat ........................................................257
Blind Spot Monitoring ..................................... 220
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing .........182
Body Mechanism Lubrication .........................292
Brake Assist System ........................................ 216
Brake Control System, Electronic ................... 216
Brake Fluid .....................................297, 335, 336
Brake System ..........................................297, 330
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................................... 330
Fluid Check ........................................ 297, 336
Master Cylinder ...........................................297
Parking .......................................................... 93
Warning Light ................................................ 81
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...........................95
Bulb Replacement ..................................309, 311
Bulbs, Light ...................................................... 258
C
Camera, Rear ...................................................123
Capacities, Fluid .....................................333, 334
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) .........................................283, 287
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...................... 296
Car Washes ......................................................328
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................. 259
Cargo Area Cover ............................................... 66
Cargo Compartment .......................................... 66
Light ...............................................................66
Luggage Carrier .............................................67
Cargo Light ......................................................... 66
Cargo Tie-Downs ................................................ 66
CD ..................................................................... 177
Cellular Phone ..................................................214
Center High Mounted Stop Light .................... 311
Certification Label ...........................................125
Chains, Tire ...................................................... 324
Chart, Tire Sizing ............................................. 312
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ...................................................................88
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................... 256
Checks, Safety .................................................256
Child Restraint ................................................. 245
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..............................................247
Child Seat Installation ................................254
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....252
Infant And Child Restraints ........................246
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ...............250
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ..248
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........246
Seating Positions ........................................ 247
Child Safety Locks ..............................................24
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................... 331
Cleaning
Wheels ........................................................ 323
Climate Control .................................................. 46
Automatic ...................................................... 47
Cold Weather Operation ....................................92
Compact Spare Tire .........................................322
Connected Services ..............187, 189, 190, 198
Contract, Service ............................................. 340
Controls ............................................................167
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .............296
Cooling System ................................................295
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................... 296
Coolant Level .............................................. 297
Cooling Capacity ................................333, 334
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................... 296
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...............................295
Inspection .......................................... 295, 297
Points To Remember .................................. 297
Pressure Cap .............................................. 296
Radiator Cap ...............................................296
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 295, 333
334, 336
Corrosion Protection ........................................327
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .............. 107, 108
Cruise Light ..................................................86, 87
Customer Assistance ...................................... 338
Cybersecurity ...................................................
140
344
D
Daytime Running Lights ....................................
42
De-Icer, Remote Start ........................................ 19
Defroster, Windshield ......................................257
Deleting A Phone .............................................182
Diagnostic System, Onboard .............................88
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..................................................286
Disabled Vehicle Towing ..................................273
Disc Drive ......................................................... 177
Disconnecting ..................................................182
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ....................... 296
Disturb ..............................................................185
Door Ajar ......................................................82, 83
Door Ajar Light .............................................82, 83
Door Locks ...................................................21, 23
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ... 24
Doors .................................................................. 21
Drag & Drop ..................................................... 165
Driver Memory Presets ....................................175
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ....................................... 26
Driving .............................................................. 137
E
Economy (Fuel) Mode ........................................
95
Electric Brake Control System ........................ 216
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................. 215
Electronic Roll Mitigation .................. 217, 220
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................................37
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ......... 57
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 108
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................... 217
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........82
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .................99
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ....................... 270
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ...................... 273
Hazard Warning Flasher .............................260
Jacking ........................................................ 262
Jump Starting ............................................. 268
Emission Control System Maintenance ........... 88
Engine .............................................................. 283
Air Cleaner .................................................. 288
Break-In Recommendations ........................ 93
Checking Oil Level ...................................... 286
Compartment .................................... 283–285
Compartment Identification ............. 283–285
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................336
Cooling ........................................................ 295
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................................259
Fails To Start ................................................. 92
Flooded, Starting .......................................... 92
Fuel Requirements ............................ 331, 333
Jump Starting ............................................. 268
Oil ..................................... 287,
333, 334, 336
Oil Filler Cap .......................................283, 287
Oil Filter .......................................................288
Oil Selection ..............................287, 333, 334
Oil Synthetic ................................................287
Starting ..........................................................90
Engine Oil Viscosity ..........................................287
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . 243, 275
Ethanol .............................................................332
Exhaust Gas Cautions .....................................259
Exhaust System ......................................259, 294
Exterior Lights .................................. 41, 258, 309
F
Family Alerts .....................................................
197
FAQ ................................................................... 198
Features ...........................................................190
Filters
Air Cleaner .................................................. 288
Air Conditioning .......................... 53, 288–290
Engine Oil ...........................................288, 336
Engine Oil Disposal .................................... 288
Flash-To-Pass ..................................................... 42
Flashers ........................................................... 260
Hazard Warning .......................................... 260
Turn Signals .................................87, 258, 311
Flooded Engine Starting ....................................92
Fluid Capacities ......................................333, 334
Fluid Leaks .......................................................258
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ........................................................... 297
Engine Oil ....................................................286
Fluid, Brake ......................................................336
Fluids And Lubricants ......................................335
345
11
Fog Lights .........................................................311
Fog Lights, Service .......................................... 311
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................... 26
Folding Rear Seats ............................................ 28
Forward Collision Warning .............................. 225
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ................................ 260
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................................273
Front Axle (Differential) ................................... 299
Fuel ...................................................................331
Additives ......................................................331
Clean Air ......................................................331
Economy Mode ............................................. 95
Ethanol ........................................................332
Gasoline ...................................................... 331
Materials Added ..........................................331
Methanol .....................................................332
Octane Rating .................................... 331, 336
Requirements .................................... 331, 333
Specifications .................................... 334, 336
Tank Capacity .................................... 333, 334
Fueling ..............................................................124
Fuses ................................................................299
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................
38
Gasoline, (Fuel) ................................................331
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................... 331
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................. 331
Gear Ranges ...................................................... 96
Getting Started ................................................ 189
Glass Cleaning .................................................329
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................................126
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...........................126
GVWR ............................................................... 125
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................
260
Head Restraints .................................................33
Headlights
Automatic ...................................................... 42
Cleaning ...................................................... 328
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........42
Lights On Reminder ......................................43
On With Wipers ............................................. 43
Passing .......................................................... 42
Heated Mirrors ................................................... 37
Heated Seats ..................................................... 32
Heated Steering Wheel ..................................... 25
Hill Start Assist ................................................ 219
Hitches
Trailer Towing .............................................. 127
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ..................... 38
Hood Prop .......................................................... 64
Hood Release .....................................................64
I
Ignition ................................................................17
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead .......................17
Key Fob Not Detected ...................................17
Keyless Ignition ............................................. 17
Keyless Push Button .....................................17
Push Button Ignition ..................................... 17
Switch ............................................................ 17
Illuminated Entry ................................................45
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................................... 16
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................. 36, 260
Instrument Cluster ...................................... 71–73
Display .....................................................74, 76
Menu Items ................................................... 77
Instrument Cluster Display
Audio ..............................................................79
Driver Assist .................................................. 78
Messages ...................................................... 79
Screen Setup ................................................ 79
Speed Warning ..............................................80
Speedometer .................................................77
Trailer Tow ..................................................... 79
Trip ................................................................. 78
Vehicle Info ....................................................77
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................... 329
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ......................131
Interior And Instrument Lights ..........................43
Interior Appearance Care ................................328
Interior Lights .....................................................43
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) .................. 45
Introduction ......................................................187
Inverter
Power .............................................................59
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ..................................... 55
346
J
Jack Location ...................................................
263
Jack Operation .................................................265
Jacking And Tire Changing ..............................262
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions .........263
Jacking Instructions ........................................ 265
Jump Starting .................................................. 268
K
Key Fob ...............................................................
14
Arm The System ............................................20
Disarm The System .......................................20
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............16
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................................................. 15
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) 16
Keyless Enter 'n Go™
Passive Entry .................................................22
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 22
Keys .................................................................... 14
Replacement .................................................16
Sentry (Immobilizer) ..................................... 16
L
Lane Change Assist ........................................... 43
LaneSense ....................................................... 121
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................... 230
Latches ............................................................ 258
Hood .............................................................. 64
Lead Free Gasoline ..........................................331
Leaks, Fluid ......................................................258
Life Of Tires ......................................................321
Liftgate ............................................................... 65
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ........................46
Light Bulbs ....................................................... 258
Lights ................................................................258
Air Bag ......................................... 81, 235, 257
Automatic Headlights ................................... 42
AWD ............................................................... 86
Brake Assist Warning ................................. 218
Brake Warning ...............................................81
Bulb Replacement .............................309, 311
Cargo ............................................................. 66
Center Mounted Stop ................................. 311
Cruise ......................................................85–87
Daytime Running .......................................... 42
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............................41
ECO Mode ..................................................... 86
Electric Power Steering .................................82
Electronic Stability Control ........................... 84
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator 82
Exterior ..................................................41, 258
Fog ...............................................................311
Forward Collision Warning .....................85, 86
Hazard Warning Flasher .............................260
Headlights On With Wipers .......................... 43
High Beam .....................................................88
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................42
Hood Open .................................................... 83
Interior ...........................................................43
LaneSense ....................................... 84, 86, 87
Lights On Reminder ......................................43
Low Fuel ........................................................ 84
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........84
NEUTRAL ....................................................... 86
Oil Temperature ............................................ 83
Park .........................................................42, 87
Passing .......................................................... 42
Reading ......................................................... 44
Rear Servicing .............................................311
Rear Tail Lamps .......................................... 311
Seat Belt Reminder .......................................81
Security Alarm ...............................................83
Service ................................................309, 311
Service AWD ..................................................85
Side Marker .................................................311
Snow Mode ....................................................87
Speed .............................................................87
Sport Mode ....................................................87
Stop Start ................................................85, 87
Tow Mode ...................................................... 87
Track Mode ....................................................87
Traction Control ...........................................218
Trailer Brake Disconnected ..........................83
Transmission Temperature .......................... 83
Turn Signals .......................... 41, 87, 258, 311
Valet Mode .................................................... 88
Vanity Mirror ..................................................36
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions ...82
347
11
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ........................80
Load Shed Battery Saver On .............................80
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction .............. 80
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ...............80
Loading Vehicle ............................................... 125
Tires .............................................................316
Locks
Child Protection .............................................24
Manual ...........................................................21
Power Door ....................................................21
Lubrication, Body .............................................292
Lug Nuts/Bolts .................................................330
Luggage Carrier ..................................................67
M
Maintenance ......................................................
64
Maintenance Free Battery .............................. 286
Maintenance Schedule ...........................276, 279
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) .........................................................84, 88
Manage My Account ........................................198
Manual
Service .........................................................341
Media Mode ..................................................... 177
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .....................25
Memory Seat ......................................................25
Memory Seats And Radio ..................................25
Methanol ..........................................................332
Mirrors ................................................................ 36
Electric Remote .............................................37
Exterior Folding ............................................. 37
Heated ........................................................... 37
Outside .......................................................... 37
Rearview ...............................................36, 260
Vanity ............................................................. 36
Mobile App .......................................................189
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ...........................................................
10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ........................226
Mopar Parts ..................................................... 340
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................. 41
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period .............................
93
O
Occupant Restraints ........................................
229
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............331, 336
Oil Change Indicator .......................................... 75
Reset ............................................................. 75
Oil Filter, Change ............................................. 288
Oil Filter, Selection ...........................................288
Oil Pressure Light ...............................................83
Oil, Engine ............................................... 287, 336
Capacity ............................................. 333, 334
Checking ..................................................... 286
Dipstick ....................................................... 286
Disposal ...................................................... 288
Filter ................................................... 288, 336
Filter Disposal .............................................288
Identification Logo ......................................287
Materials Added To .....................................287
Pressure Warning Light ................................ 83
Recommendation .....................287, 333, 334
Synthetic ..................................................... 287
Viscosity .................................... 287, 333, 334
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............................88
Operating Precautions .......................................88
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ..........................................341
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................................37
P
Paint Care ........................................................
327
Parking Brake .....................................................93
ParkSense System, Rear .................................116
Passive Entry ......................................................22
Performance ...................................................... 78
Personalized Main Menu Bar ......................... 165
Pets ...................................................................257
Phone Mode .....................................................179
Pinch Protection .................................................64
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........316
Power
Brakes .........................................................330
Distribution Center (Fuses) ........................300
Door Locks .................................................... 21
Inverter .......................................................... 59
348
Liftgate .......................................................... 65
Mirrors ........................................................... 37
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................ 57
Seats ..............................................................31
Steering ..............................................105, 335
Sunroof ..........................................................63
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ................24
Windows ........................................................ 62
Power Seats
Down ..............................................................31
Forward ..........................................................31
Rearward ....................................................... 31
Up ...................................................................31
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...................233
Preparation For Jacking .................................. 263
Presets ............................................................. 175
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ....................................................233
R
Radial Ply Tires ................................................
320
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 296
Radio
Presets ........................................................ 175
Radio Controls ................................................. 167
Radio Mode ......................................................167
Radio Operation ......................................167, 214
Radio Remote Controls ...................................
166
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ............................ 46
Rear Air Conditioning .........................................50
Rear Axle (Differential) ....................................299
Rear Camera ....................................................123
Rear Cross Path ...............................................222
Rear ParkSense System ..................................116
Rear Seat Reminder Alert ............................... 215
Rear Seats, Folding ........................................... 28
Rear Wiper/Washer ...........................................46
Reclining Front Seats .........................................27
Recreational Towing ............................... 133, 134
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 135
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .136
Reformulated Gasoline ................................... 331
Refrigerant .......................................................289
Release, Hood ....................................................64
Reminder, Seat Belt ........................................ 230
Remote Control
Starting System ............................................ 18
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ....193, 198
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ................ 194
Remote Features, Starting .....................193, 200
Remote Keyless Entry ........................................14
Arm The Alarm .............................................. 20
Disarm The Alarm ......................................... 20
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............16
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ..........166
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ............................... 19
Remote Starting System ................................... 18
Replacement Bulbs .........................................309
Replacement Keys .............................................16
Replacement Tires .......................................... 321
Reporting Safety Defects ................................ 341
Restraints, Child .............................................. 245
Restraints, Head ................................................33
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ...........................66
Roadside Assistance ..............................194, 199
Roll Over Warning .................................................9
Roof Type Carrier ............................................... 67
Rotation, Tires ................................................. 326
S
Safety ...............................................................
166
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .......................... 257
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................... 258
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................... 341
Safety Features ................................................166
Safety Information, Tire ...................................312
Safety Tips ....................................................... 256
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................................ 259
Satellite Radio .................................................. 171
Saved Radio Stations ...................................... 175
Schedule, Maintenance ..........................276, 279
Seat Belt Reminder ............................................81
Seat Belts ................................................230, 257
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................... 232
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .....232
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ...................................................232
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 234
Child Restraints .......................................... 245
Energy Management Feature ....................234
349
11
Extender ......................................................233
Front Seat ...........................................230, 231
Inspection ................................................... 257
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .....................231
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 232
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................... 230
Operating Instructions ................................231
Pregnant Women ........................................233
Pretensioners ............................................. 233
Rear Seat .................................................... 230
Reminder .................................................... 230
Seat Belt Extender ......................................233
Seat Belt Pretensioner ...............................233
Untwisting Procedure .................................232
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................. 328
Seats ..................................................... 26, 31, 32
Adjustment .......................................26, 27, 31
Easy Entry ......................................................32
Heated ...........................................................32
Memory ......................................................... 25
Rear Folding ........................................... 26, 28
Reclining ........................................................27
Seatback Release .........................................26
Tilting ............................................................. 26
Vented ........................................................... 33
Ventilated ...................................................... 33
Security Alarm
Arm The System ............................................
20
Disarm The System .......................................20
Security System ...........................................20, 83
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 334, 336
Send & Go ...............................................195, 199
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................................... 16
Sentry Key Replacement ................................... 16
Service Assistance .......................................... 338
Service Contract .............................................. 340
Service Manuals .............................................. 341
Settings, Audio .................................................175
Shifting ............................................................... 94
Automatic Transmission ........................ 94, 96
Shoulder Belts ................................................. 230
Signals, Turn .....................................87, 258, 311
Sirius Satellite Radio ........................................171
Favorites ......................................................173
Replay ..........................................................172
Traffic & Weather ........................................173
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ............................................173
Favorites ......................................................173
Replay ..........................................................172
Traffic and Weather ....................................173
Smart Watch ....................................................198
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................. 324
Snow Tires ....................................................... 322
SOS Call .................................................. 190, 198
Spare Tires .....................................264, 322, 323
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ............................................336
Oil ................................................................ 336
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .................................................108
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................. 112
Cancel ......................................................... 108
Resume .......................................................108
Set ............................................................... 108
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .............. 107, 108
Starting ...............................................................90
Button ............................................................ 17
Cold Weather ................................................ 92
Engine Fails To Start .....................................92
Remote .......................................................... 18
Starting And Operating ......................................90
Starting Procedures ...........................................90
Steering .............................................................. 24
Power ...........................................................105
Tilt Column .................................................... 24
Wheel, Heated .............................................. 25
Wheel, Tilt ......................................................24
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................... 166
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....... 166
Stolen Vehicle Assistance ...................... 196, 199
Storage ............................................................... 53
Storage, Vehicle ........................................ 53, 327
Store Radio Presets .........................................175
Storing Your Vehicle .........................................327
Sun Roof ......................................................63, 64
Sun Visor ............................................................ 36
Sunglasses Storage ...........................................54
Sunshade Operation ..........................................64
Sway Control, Trailer ........................................220
Symbol Glossary ................................................ 10
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................................ 287
350
System, Vehicle Security ....................................20
System, Remote Starting .................................. 18
T
Telescoping Steering Column ............................
24
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............. 52
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ..................................... 66
Tilt Steering Column .......................................... 24
Tire And Loading Information Placard ............316
Tire Markings ................................................... 312
Tire Safety Information ....................................312
Tires .......................................258, 318, 322, 326
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................... 321
Air Pressure .................................................318
Chains ......................................................... 324
Changing .....................................................262
Compact Spare ...........................................322
General Information .......................... 318, 322
High Speed ..................................................319
Inflation Pressure ....................................... 319
Life Of Tires .................................................321
Load Capacity ............................................. 316
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..85, 226
Quality Grading ........................................... 326
Radial .......................................................... 320
Replacement ...............................................321
Rotation .......................................................326
Safety ..................................................312, 318
Sizes ............................................................ 312
Snow Tires .................................................. 322
Spare Tires ................................264, 322, 323
Spinning ...................................................... 320
Trailer Towing .............................................. 131
Tread Wear Indicators ................................320
Wheel Nut Torque .......................................330
To Open Hood .....................................................64
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ........................ 129
Tow N Go .......................................................... 101
Towing ..................................................... 126, 273
Disabled Vehicle ......................................... 273
Guide ..................................................128, 129
Recreational ...................................... 133, 134
Weight ................................................ 128, 129
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..........................133
Traction Control ............................................... 220
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...............................220
Trailer Towing ...................................................126
Hitches ........................................................ 127
Minimum Requirements ............................ 130
Tips ..............................................................133
Trailer And Tongue Weight ......................... 129
Wiring .......................................................... 132
Trailer Towing Guide ...............................128, 129
Trailer Weight ..........................................128, 129
Transfer Case ...................................................299
Electronically Shifted ....................................99
Fluid .............................................................335
Maintenance ...............................................299
Transmission ...................................................... 96
Automatic ............................................. 96, 298
Fluid .............................................................335
Maintenance ...............................................298
Shifting .......................................................... 94
Transporting Pets .............................................257
Tread Wear Indicators .....................................320
Turn Signals ............................................... 87, 311
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features ...................................
183
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone ......................................... 186
Uconnect Phone ..................................... 180, 182
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress .......................... 184
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress .....................184
Bluetooth Communication Link .................187
Call Continuation ........................................185
Call Controls ................................................183
Call Termination ..........................................185
Cancel Command .......................................180
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing .........182
Help Command ...........................................180
Join Calls ..................................................... 185
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite ....................................................... 182
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress .......................................185
Managing Your Favorites ............................183
351
11
Natural Speech ...........................................180
Operation .................................................... 180
Overview ......................................................179
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone .......................................................... 180
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device .182
Phonebook Download ................................183
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ............... 185
Power-Up ..................................................... 187
Recent Calls ................................................184
Redial .......................................................... 185
To Remove A Favorite .................................183
Toggling Between Calls .............................. 185
Touch-Tone Number Entry ..........................184
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone .. 185
Voice Command ......................................... 186
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ............. 22
Uconnect System .............................................163
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............................326
Unleaded Gasoline .......................................... 331
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .....................232
V
Vanity Mirrors .....................................................
36
Vehicle Finder ......................................... 195, 199
Vehicle Health Alert ......................................... 197
Vehicle Health Report ..................................... 196
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............... 330
Vehicle Loading .......................................125, 316
Vehicle Maintenance .......................................287
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .....................10
Vehicle Notifications ........................................197
Vehicle Security System .................................... 20
Vehicle Storage ......................................... 53, 327
Viscosity, Engine Oil .........................................287
Voice Command .................................................35
Voice Recognition System (VR) .........................35
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard ...............................
260
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) ......................................................84
Warnings, Roll Over ..............................................9
Warranty Information ...................................... 340
Washers, Windshield ................................45, 286
Washing Vehicle .............................................. 328
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ............................ 323
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim .............................323
Wi-Fi ..................................................................195
Wind Buffeting ................................................... 63
Window Fogging .................................................53
Windows ............................................................. 62
Power .............................................................62
Reset Auto-Up ............................................... 62
Windshield Defroster .......................................257
Windshield Washers .................................45, 286
Fluid .............................................................286
Windshield Wiper Blades ................................292
Windshield Wipers .............................................45
Wipers Blade Replacement ............................ 292
Wipers, Intermittent ...........................................45
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .......................................46
Wireless Charging Pad ...................................... 59
352
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while
distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal
injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical
devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or
other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a
serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while
the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or
provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional
information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Dodge
®
brand dealer.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
First Edition
25_WD_OM_EN_USC
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-
DATE OWNER’S MANUAL, RADIO
AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
Canada
USA
mopar.com/om
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Dodge
®
brand vehicle. Simply
download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the
search keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
©2024 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Dodge est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc.,utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
